Pioneer Stereo Receiver VSX 43TX User Manual

AUDIO/VIDEO MULTI-CHANNEL  
RECEIVER  
VSX-43TX  
Operating Instructions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Table of Contents  
Features ................................................. 6 Displays & Controls ............................ 27  
Rem ote Control of Other  
Techno Tidbits & Problem -solving ..... 88  
Com ponents ........................................ 59  
Display ........................................................................ 27  
Dolby ........................................................................... 88  
Dolby Digital ......................................................... 88  
Dolby Pro Logic II ................................................. 88  
Dolby Digital Surround EX .................................. 89  
DTS ............................................................................. 89  
DTS ........................................................................ 89  
DTS-ES .................................................................. 89  
DTS Neo:6 ............................................................. 89  
DTS 96/24 .............................................................. 89  
THX ............................................................................. 90  
Speaker Placem ent Inform ation ............................... 91  
Preset Code List ......................................................... 93  
Troubleshooting ......................................................... 95  
Schem ata of Setup .................................................. 100  
Specifications ........................................................... 102  
Front Panel ................................................................. 28  
Setting Up the Rem ote Control to Control Other  
Com ponents ............................................................... 59  
Recalling Settings Stored in the  
Before You Start .................................... 7  
Rem ote Control .......................................................... 30  
Checking the Supplied Accessories ........................... 7  
Back Panel .................................................................. 32  
Preparing the Rem ote Control .................................... 7  
Loading the batteries ............................................. 7  
Rem ote Control ..................................................... 59  
Program m ing Signals from Other Rem ote  
Controls (LEARNING Mode) ................................ 60  
Using Rem ote Control with Other Com ponents ..... 61  
CD/MD/CD-R/VCR/DVD/LD/DVD Recorder/  
Cassette Deck operations ..................................... 61  
Cable TV/ Satellite TV/  
Setting Up for Surround Sound ........ 34  
Operating range of rem ote control unit ............... 8  
Installing the Receiver ................................................. 8  
Opening the Front Panel ............................................. 8  
SURRBACK SYSTEM (Surround Back System ) ...... 35  
NORMAL setup .......................................................... 36  
SPEAKER SETTING .............................................. 37  
CHANNEL LEVEL (channel balance) ................... 39  
CHANNEL DELAY ................................................. 40  
Easy Setup Guide Part 1 ....................... 9  
Hom e Theater: The Basics .......................................... 9  
1) Your Hom e System ............................................ 9  
2) The Source Material ........................................... 9  
3) The Listening Modes .......................................... 9  
Conclusion .............................................................. 9  
1 Hooking Up Your DVD Player & TV ..................... 10  
Digital Connections .............................................. 10  
2 Speaker Connections ........................................... 11  
3 Setting up the Main Unit ...................................... 12  
4 Assigning the Digital Inputs ................................ 12  
Digital TV/ TV operations ..................................... 62  
Setting up the DIRECT FUNCTION ........................... 63  
Basic Operation ................................... 41  
Stereo and Multichannel Playback ........................... 41  
Switching ANALOG/DIGITAL Signal Input ......... 42  
Listening Modes ........................................................ 43  
STEREO m odes ..................................................... 43  
MOVIE m odes (SURROUND m ode) .................... 44  
MUSIC m odes (SURROUND m ode).................... 45  
Adjusting the Effect of a Listening Mode ........... 46  
Adding/Adjusting the Effect in  
Using Other Functions ........................ 64  
Recording from Audio/Video Com ponents ............. 64  
SECOND ZONE (Speaker System B)/FRONT BI-AMP  
Setup ........................................................................... 65  
Stereo playback in another room (SECOND  
ZONE) .................................................................... 65  
Bi-am ping the front speakers  
(FRONT BI-AMP) ................................................... 65  
A/B Speaker Button .............................................. 66  
Connecting Additional Am plifiers ............................ 67  
Multi Operations ........................................................ 68  
Perform ing Multi Operations ............................... 69  
SYSTEM OFF .............................................................. 70  
Using SYSTEM OFF.............................................. 71  
The PIONEER SR System : Operating other PIONEER  
com ponents ............................................................... 71  
Resetting the Rem ote Control .................................. 72  
Erasing Multi Operations ..................................... 72  
Erasing Learned Rem ote Control Com m ands ... 72  
Erasing All Rem ote Control settings ................... 72  
Resetting the Main Unit ............................................ 73  
Dolby Pro Logic II Music Mode ........................... 46  
Listening with Acoustic Calibration EQ ................... 47  
Reducing Noise During Playback  
Easy Setup Guide Part 2 ..................... 13  
1 QUICK Setup ......................................................... 13  
2 Playing a DVD with Surround Sound ................. 14  
(DIGITAL NR Function) .............................................. 47  
Listening in MIDNIGHT Mode ................................... 48  
Listening in LOUDNESS Mode ................................. 48  
Adjusting Bass and Treble (TONE CONTROL) ........ 49  
Listening in HI–BIT/SAMPLING Mode ...................... 50  
DVD-Audio/MULTI CHANNEL IN Playback .............. 50  
SB CH MODE button .................................................. 51  
SB CH MODE......................................................... 51  
VIRTUAL SURROUND BACK Mode ..................... 51  
DUAL MONO setting and Playback .......................... 52  
Using Headphones .................................................... 52  
Video Select ............................................................... 53  
Adjusting the Brightness of the Display  
Connecting Your Equipm ent .............. 15  
Connecting your TV ................................................... 15  
Com ponent Video Input Default Settings ........... 15  
Connecting Video Com ponents ................................ 16  
Connecting a DVD player ..................................... 16  
Connecting VCRs or DVRs ................................... 17  
Connecting a Video Com ponent  
to the Front Panel ................................................. 17  
Connecting Satellite TV (SAT) Com ponents ...... 18  
Connecting Analog Audio Com ponents .................. 19  
Connecting to the Multi Channel Analog Inputs  
(DVD-Audio or Super Audio CD (SACD) com patible  
Fine Tuning Your System ................... 74  
(DIMMER) ................................................................... 53  
Other System Settings .............................................. 74  
THX CINEMA Setup ................................................... 75  
Assigning the Digital Inputs ...................................... 76  
Assigning the Com ponent Video Inputs .................. 77  
FUNCTION RENAME ................................................. 78  
Expert Setup ............................................................... 79  
CROSSOVER NETWORK ...................................... 80  
FINE CHANNEL LEVEL ......................................... 81  
FINE CHANNEL DELAY ........................................ 82  
ACOUSTIC CAL EQ ............................................... 84  
BASS PEAK LEVEL ............................................... 86  
DYNAMIC RANGE CONTROL .............................. 87  
player) ............................................................................. 20  
Connecting Digital Audio Com ponents ................... 21  
Digital Input Default Settings .............................. 22  
Connecting the Radio Antennas ............................... 23  
Using outdoor antennas ...................................... 23  
Connecting Speakers ................................................. 24  
Speaker im pedance .............................................. 25  
Bi-wiring your speakers ....................................... 25  
Placing Your Speakers ............................................... 26  
Speaker placem ent ............................................... 26  
AC Power Cord ........................................................... 26  
AC Outlet [switched 100W m ax]............................... 26  
Using the Tuner ................................... 54  
Autom atic and Manual Tuning ................................. 54  
MPX Mode ............................................................ 54  
Direct Access Tuning ................................................. 55  
Mem orizing Frequently Used Stations .................... 56  
Nam ing Mem orized Stations .................................... 57  
Recalling Mem orized Stations .................................. 58  
4
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Table of Contents  
Features ................................................. 6 Displays & Controls ............................ 27  
Rem ote Control of Other  
Techno Tidbits & Problem -solving ..... 88  
Com ponents ........................................ 59  
Display ........................................................................ 27  
Dolby ........................................................................... 88  
Dolby Digital ......................................................... 88  
Dolby Pro Logic II ................................................. 88  
Dolby Digital Surround EX .................................. 89  
DTS ............................................................................. 89  
DTS ........................................................................ 89  
DTS-ES .................................................................. 89  
DTS Neo:6 ............................................................. 89  
DTS 96/24 .............................................................. 89  
THX ............................................................................. 90  
Speaker Placem ent Inform ation ............................... 91  
Preset Code List ......................................................... 93  
Troubleshooting ......................................................... 95  
Schem ata of Setup .................................................. 100  
Specifications ........................................................... 102  
Front Panel ................................................................. 28  
Setting Up the Rem ote Control to Control Other  
Com ponents ............................................................... 59  
Recalling Settings Stored in the  
Before You Start .................................... 7  
Rem ote Control .......................................................... 30  
Checking the Supplied Accessories ........................... 7  
Back Panel .................................................................. 32  
Preparing the Rem ote Control .................................... 7  
Loading the batteries ............................................. 7  
Rem ote Control ..................................................... 59  
Program m ing Signals from Other Rem ote  
Controls (LEARNING Mode) ................................ 60  
Using Rem ote Control with Other Com ponents ..... 61  
CD/MD/CD-R/VCR/DVD/LD/DVD Recorder/  
Cassette Deck operations ..................................... 61  
Cable TV/ Satellite TV/  
Setting Up for Surround Sound ........ 34  
Operating range of rem ote control unit ............... 8  
Installing the Receiver ................................................. 8  
Opening the Front Panel ............................................. 8  
SURRBACK SYSTEM (Surround Back System ) ...... 35  
NORMAL setup .......................................................... 36  
SPEAKER SETTING .............................................. 37  
CHANNEL LEVEL (channel balance) ................... 39  
CHANNEL DELAY ................................................. 40  
Easy Setup Guide Part 1 ....................... 9  
Hom e Theater: The Basics .......................................... 9  
1) Your Hom e System ............................................ 9  
2) The Source Material ........................................... 9  
3) The Listening Modes .......................................... 9  
Conclusion .............................................................. 9  
1 Hooking Up Your DVD Player & TV ..................... 10  
Digital Connections .............................................. 10  
2 Speaker Connections ........................................... 11  
3 Setting up the Main Unit ...................................... 12  
4 Assigning the Digital Inputs ................................ 12  
Digital TV/ TV operations ..................................... 62  
Setting up the DIRECT FUNCTION ........................... 63  
Basic Operation ................................... 41  
Stereo and Multichannel Playback ........................... 41  
Switching ANALOG/DIGITAL Signal Input ......... 42  
Listening Modes ........................................................ 43  
STEREO m odes ..................................................... 43  
MOVIE m odes (SURROUND m ode) .................... 44  
MUSIC m odes (SURROUND m ode).................... 45  
Adjusting the Effect of a Listening Mode ........... 46  
Adding/Adjusting the Effect in  
Using Other Functions ........................ 64  
Recording from Audio/Video Com ponents ............. 64  
SECOND ZONE (Speaker System B)/FRONT BI-AMP  
Setup ........................................................................... 65  
Stereo playback in another room (SECOND  
ZONE) .................................................................... 65  
Bi-am ping the front speakers  
(FRONT BI-AMP) ................................................... 65  
A/B Speaker Button .............................................. 66  
Connecting Additional Am plifiers ............................ 67  
Multi Operations ........................................................ 68  
Perform ing Multi Operations ............................... 69  
SYSTEM OFF .............................................................. 70  
Using SYSTEM OFF.............................................. 71  
The PIONEER SR System : Operating other PIONEER  
com ponents ............................................................... 71  
Resetting the Rem ote Control .................................. 72  
Erasing Multi Operations ..................................... 72  
Erasing Learned Rem ote Control Com m ands ... 72  
Erasing All Rem ote Control settings ................... 72  
Resetting the Main Unit ............................................ 73  
Dolby Pro Logic II Music Mode ........................... 46  
Listening with Acoustic Calibration EQ ................... 47  
Reducing Noise During Playback  
Easy Setup Guide Part 2 ..................... 13  
1 QUICK Setup ......................................................... 13  
2 Playing a DVD with Surround Sound ................. 14  
(DIGITAL NR Function) .............................................. 47  
Listening in MIDNIGHT Mode ................................... 48  
Listening in LOUDNESS Mode ................................. 48  
Adjusting Bass and Treble (TONE CONTROL) ........ 49  
Listening in HI–BIT/SAMPLING Mode ...................... 50  
DVD-Audio/MULTI CHANNEL IN Playback .............. 50  
SB CH MODE button .................................................. 51  
SB CH MODE......................................................... 51  
VIRTUAL SURROUND BACK Mode ..................... 51  
DUAL MONO setting and Playback .......................... 52  
Using Headphones .................................................... 52  
Video Select ............................................................... 53  
Adjusting the Brightness of the Display  
Connecting Your Equipm ent .............. 15  
Connecting your TV ................................................... 15  
Com ponent Video Input Default Settings ........... 15  
Connecting Video Com ponents ................................ 16  
Connecting a DVD player ..................................... 16  
Connecting VCRs or DVRs ................................... 17  
Connecting a Video Com ponent  
to the Front Panel ................................................. 17  
Connecting Satellite TV (SAT) Com ponents ...... 18  
Connecting Analog Audio Com ponents .................. 19  
Connecting to the Multi Channel Analog Inputs  
(DVD-Audio or Super Audio CD (SACD) com patible  
Fine Tuning Your System ................... 74  
(DIMMER) ................................................................... 53  
Other System Settings .............................................. 74  
THX CINEMA Setup ................................................... 75  
Assigning the Digital Inputs ...................................... 76  
Assigning the Com ponent Video Inputs .................. 77  
FUNCTION RENAME ................................................. 78  
Expert Setup ............................................................... 79  
CROSSOVER NETWORK ...................................... 80  
FINE CHANNEL LEVEL ......................................... 81  
FINE CHANNEL DELAY ........................................ 82  
ACOUSTIC CAL EQ ............................................... 84  
BASS PEAK LEVEL ............................................... 86  
DYNAMIC RANGE CONTROL .............................. 87  
player) ............................................................................. 20  
Connecting Digital Audio Com ponents ................... 21  
Digital Input Default Settings .............................. 22  
Connecting the Radio Antennas ............................... 23  
Using outdoor antennas ...................................... 23  
Connecting Speakers ................................................. 24  
Speaker im pedance .............................................. 25  
Bi-wiring your speakers ....................................... 25  
Placing Your Speakers ............................................... 26  
Speaker placem ent ............................................... 26  
AC Power Cord ........................................................... 26  
AC Outlet [switched 100W m ax]............................... 26  
Using the Tuner ................................... 54  
Autom atic and Manual Tuning ................................. 54  
MPX Mode ............................................................ 54  
Direct Access Tuning ................................................. 55  
Mem orizing Frequently Used Stations .................... 56  
Nam ing Mem orized Stations .................................... 57  
Recalling Mem orized Stations .................................. 58  
4
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Features  
High Quality, Balanced Multichannel Design  
The VSX-43TX receiver is constructed with Pioneers industry-leading advanced and well balanced m ultichannel  
concept. This m eans it is designed to reproduce m usic and m ovie soundtracks as close as possible to the  
intentions of the producer during m astering. The receiver uses a revolutionary 3-D Fram e Construction  
technique and a Sym m etrical Power Train Design, with high-perform ance Advanced Direct Energy MOS-FET  
output devices, generating 100 watts of power for 7 independent channels.  
Multichannel Acoustic Calibration EQ System (MCACC)  
In order to m ake setting up as easy as possible for users we have created the MCACC system . This unique and  
convenient way of getting good surround sound from the receiver m akes trouble-free set up a snap. The  
MCACC system creates a m onitoring environm ent to establish the param eters of the sound in regards to each  
speaker for the specific room you are using. The Acoustic Calibration EQ feature m akes sure each speaker is  
used to m axim um effect in conjunction with the overall sound. The resulting settings finely attune the overall  
surround sound for the space used.  
Dolby Digital EX, DTS-ES, DTS 96/ 24 and the Latest Audio and Video  
Form ats  
The VSX-43TX is equipped with Dolby Digital EX decoding, the very latest Dolby Digital contribution to hom e  
theater with surround back speakers in addition to surround speakers. These additional speakers m ake hom e  
theater even m ore realistic and powerful. Naturally, you can also play all existing audio form ats, including the  
recently developed Dolby Pro Logic II and DTS-ES Extended Surround form ats on the VSX-43TX as well. On the  
video side, the com ponent video output is fully com patible with high definition, progressive-scan digital video  
(720p).  
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.  
Dolby, “Pro Logic, “Surround EXand double-D  
symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.  
Lucasfilm and THX are trademarks or registered  
trademarks of Lucasfilm, Ltd. & TM. Surround EX  
is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby  
Laboratories, and is a trademark of Dolby  
Laboratories. All rights reserved. Used under  
authorization.  
"DTS", "DTS-ES Extended Surround" and "Neo:6" are  
trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.  
Universal Player Com patibility (DVD Audio/ Super Audio CD [SACD]  
)
This receiver incorporates the latest technology and is able to handle cutting edge audio form ats, like DVD Audio  
and Super Audio CD (SACD) which are just hitting the m arket. Its high com patibility offers a variety of inputs to  
decode all types of sources at the highest possible quality. The receivers m ultichannel input connections lets you  
hook up eight discrete channels of audio.  
Audio Scaler (HI BIT/ HI SAMPLING)  
This new technology enables the user to hear CD and DVD, as well as other soundtracks at a wider dynam ic  
range, allowing for finer audio reproduction. This Audio Scaler approxim ates the audio of high end form ats just  
becom ing available now.  
Easy-to-use Rem ote Control and Urushi Lacquer Alum inum Panel  
This new rem ote control is extrem ely convenient to use. One button is dedicated to one task in the control of the  
receiver, elim inating confusing buttons whose purpose are unclear. In addition, this rem ote can be used to  
operate a variety of other com ponents sim ply by recalling the appropriate setup codes. The sm ooth finish and  
left-right sym m etry of the stylish urushi lacquer alum inum panel is em blem atic of the high quality of the  
equipm ent.  
The Energy-saving Design  
This unit is designed to use 0.6 W of energy when the receiver is in standby m ode.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before You Start  
Checking the Supplied Accessories  
Please check that you have received all of the following supplied accessories.  
AA” IEC LR6  
batteries x 2  
FM Wire Antenna  
AM Loop Antenna  
AUDIO/VIDEO MULTI-CHANNEL  
RECEIVER  
VSX-43TX  
Operating Instructions  
Operating  
Instructions  
Rem ote Control Unit  
Preparing the Rem ote Control  
Loading the batteries  
Load the batteries into the remote control as shown below. Please use alkaline batteries. When you notice a  
decrease in the operating range, replace all batteries with new ones.  
AAIEC LR6  
batteries x 2  
1
2
3
CAUTION!  
Incorrect use of batteries may result in such hazards as leakage and bursting. Observe the following precautions.  
Never use new and old batteries together.  
Insert the plus and minus sides of the batteries properly according to the marks in the battery case.  
Batteries with the same shape may have different voltages. Do not use different batteries together.  
When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public institutions  
rules that apply in your country or area.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before You Start  
Operating range of rem ote control unit  
The area in which you can use the remote control to operate the VSX-43TX is fairly large. To use, point the  
remote control toward the remote sensor on the front panel of this unit while within the range shown below.  
Remote control may not function properly if:  
There are obstacles between the remote control and the  
remote sensor.  
Direct sunlight or fluorescent light is shining onto the  
remote sensor.  
The receiver located near a device emitting infrared rays.  
30  
30  
Operated simultaneously with another remote control  
which uses infrared rays.  
23 feet (7m )  
Installing the Receiver  
CAUTION!  
Do not cover this unit in any way, for exam-  
ple with a sheet or piece of cloth. This would  
prevent proper heat dispersal.  
Do not any place object directly on top of  
this unit. This also would prevent proper heat  
dispersal.  
Be sure to leave adequate ventilation space  
around the amp! When installing in a rack,  
shelf, etc., be sure to leave more than 8  
inches of space above the receiver.  
8 inches (20 cm )  
Receiver  
Opening the Front Panel  
To open the front panel push gently on the lower third of the  
panel with your finger.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ea s y S e t u p Gu id e P a rt 1  
Hom e Theater: The Basics  
Most consumers are used to using stereo equipment to listen to music but many people are not used to home theater  
systems that give you many more options when listening to soundtracks. In fact, home theater is not really  
complicated and this little guide should give you an understanding of the basics. Home theater refers to the use of  
multiple audio tracks combined with multiple speakers to create a surround sound effect.  
There are three different factors involved in getting surround sound. Each contribute to what kind of sound you get.  
These factors are:  
1) The equipment you are using for your home theater setup. Particularly important is the number of speakers you are  
using. We call this your speaker configuration.  
2) The 'source' material you are using. This is the actual product (like a DVD) or broadcast (like cable TV) you are  
listening to/watching. We call this the source.  
3) The last factor is the listening mode you choose on the VSX-43TX receiver. These are explained below and in  
subsequent chapters but most likely the PRO LOGIC II MOVIE for moves and the PRO LOGIC II MUSIC for music will  
be fine.  
Let's start with the home theater setup you have in your home.  
1) Your Hom e System  
The heart of your system is the VSX-43TX receiver and it is very flexible in getting you theater-like surround sound. You  
can use this receiver with anywhere from two to seven speakers (front left, front right, center, surround left and right,  
and surround back left and right) and a subwoofer to get home theater surround sound. We recommend you use seven  
speakers and a subwoofer. If this is not possible follow the instructions in "QUICK Setup" in the "Easy Setup Guide Part  
2" and you will still be able to get good surround sound. Also, a DVD player is essential for home theater and you can  
also hook up satellite or cable TV tuner to this receiver and get a more home theater-like sound from these sources.  
2) The Source Material  
DVDs have become the basic source material for home theater because they are convenient to use and offer excellent  
sound and picture quality as well as allow users to enjoy home theater soundtracks with more than two channels of  
audio. For example, Dolby Pro Logic plays back four channels (front left, front right, center and a single channel for both  
surround speakers), Dolby Digital and DTS sources usually have six discrete channels (front left, front right, center,  
surround left and right and a channel that powers the subwoofer) of sound. Since the subwoofer channel is only for  
bass sounds it is expressed as .1 of a channel and this multichannel setup has been named 5.1 channel sound.  
It is important you consult the manual that came with your DVD player as well to make sure the player is outputting a  
surround soundtrack and all the other settings are appropriate for your home theater.  
3) The Listening Modes  
This receiver has many different listening modes and they are designed to cover all the speaker configurations and  
types of sources you might be using. In general, the PRO LOGIC II MOVIE listening mode is the easiest way to get  
realistic surround sound for movies. For music the basic listening mode for music is PRO LOGIC II MUSIC.  
To listen to music in stereo simply choose the STEREO listening mode. Other possibilities (like listening to a stereo CD  
with all seven speakers or taking a stereo source and getting multichannel home theater-like sound) are explained in  
listening modes (pages 43–45).  
Conclusion  
These are the three basic factors that contribute to your home theater sound. The easiest thing is to hook up seven  
speakers and a subwoofer and simply play your DVDs with PRO LOGIC II MOVIE listening mode. This will give you  
realistic and enjoyable home theater sound. First hook up your equipment, like your DVD player, TV and speakers. Then  
follow the Easy Setup Guide instructions to set up your system for surround sound. It is very important you do one of  
the surround sound setups to get optimal sound from your receiver.  
For more details on any of the information presented here check the main section of the manual.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ea s y S e t u p Gu id e P a rt 1  
Before m aking or changing the connections, sw itch off the pow er and disconnect the pow er cord from  
the AC outlet.  
1 Hooking Up Your DVD Player & TV  
In order to use Dolby Digital/DTS soundtracks, which are at the heart of home theater, you need to hook up your  
DVD player with digital audio connections. You can do this by either a coaxial or an optical connection, you dont  
need to do both. The quality of these two types of connections is the same but since some DVD players only  
have one type of digital terminal you need to figure out which yours has and hook it up to the appropriate  
terminal on the receiver. In order to do this you will need the proper cable. For coaxial connections you can use a  
regular RCA video cord or the specially-made coaxial cords, they have the same type of plugs. For optical  
connections you will need a special optical cable which you can buy at your local stereo store. For more  
information on cords and cables see page 21. You should also hook up your DVD player with analog audio  
connections. Use regular RCA stereo cords for these connections. Also hook up the video connection on your  
DVD player, and your TV to this receiver. For your TV it's easiest to use a regular composite (RCA) video cord, as  
shown below. S Video and Component video cords are of higher quality than RCA video cords and may also be  
used with this unit.  
Digital Connections  
Some DVD players have both coaxial and optical terminals, but there is no need to connect both. If your DVD  
player has a coaxial terminal (not a PCM-only output) for the audio out hook it up using this terminal. Follow the  
diagram below. This is the best scenario, as you will be able to follow the default settings of this receiver and  
won't need to assign the digital inputs (you should use DIGITAL IN 3).  
If your DVD player only has an optical terminal for the audio output you can hook it up using one of the DIGITAL  
IN terminals between 1-2 (for example, DIGITAL IN 2). In this case, you will need to assign the digital input  
(which means tell the receiver which input you used for your DVD digital audio). See page 12 for this.  
RCA stereo cord  
RCA video cord  
ANALOG  
AUDIO  
R
R
L
L
R
L
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
OUT  
1
(TV/  
SAT)  
IN  
DVD/  
LD  
MONITOR OUT  
IN  
VIDEO  
S VIDEO  
R
L
2
(CD-R/  
IN  
DVD player  
TAPE1)  
E  
ASSIGNABLE  
PCM/  
PRE OUT  
DIGITAL  
OUTPUT  
OR OUT  
AM LOOP  
2DIGITAL  
/
FM UNBAL 75Ω  
ANTENNA  
DTS  
RCA video cord  
SUB  
WOOFER  
CENTER  
IN  
OUT1  
OUT2  
CONTROL  
3
IN  
P
P
B
OUT  
FRONT  
R
(DVD/  
MONITOR OUT  
R
R
L
LD)  
1
(TV/  
IN  
PLAY  
IN  
SUR-  
(DVD/LD)  
1
IN  
(not a PCM-only  
output)  
ROUND  
SAT)  
IN  
Y
R
L
2
(CD-R/  
TAPE1)  
CD-R/  
IN  
VCR1/  
DVR  
(Single)  
TAPE1  
4
SUR-  
ROUND  
BACK  
R
OUT  
REC  
OUT  
P
P
B
L
L
()  
FRONT  
3
(DVD/  
LD)  
PLAY  
IN  
IN  
IN  
R
R
MD/  
VCR2  
TAPE2  
SUR-  
4
2
(TV/SAT) IN  
IN  
ROUD  
OUT  
REC  
OUT  
Y
You only need to make  
one DIGITAL connection.  
(CD)  
R
L
CD  
IN  
SUB  
WOOF-  
ER  
CEN-  
TER  
TV/  
SAT  
IN  
P
P
B
DIGITAL  
LINE  
IN  
SUR-  
DVD/  
LD  
ROUND  
BACK  
R
IN  
R
L
DIGITAL  
R
L
R
L
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
MULTI CH IN  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
coaxial cord  
optical cord  
VIDEO INPUT  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ea s y S e t u p Gu id e P a rt 1  
2 Speaker Connections  
Home theater is designed to be setup with five, or seven speakers (front left & right; center; surround left &  
right; and, optimally, surround back left & right) and a subwoofer, but you can use this receiver with fewer  
speakers. Hook up the speakers you have to the A speaker terminals on the back of the receiver. If you only  
have two speakers hook them up as FRONT. If you have three hook up the single speaker as CENTER. Follow  
the diagram below in order to hook up all your speakers. A center speaker is very important for watching films  
because in digital soundtracks the dialog comes from the center speaker. If you do not have a center speaker  
you must tell the receiver the center channel is off or when you listen to digital soundtracks you won't hear any  
dialog. This can be easily accomplished by following the steps in the Surround Sound QUICK setup instructions  
from page 13 of the Easy Setup Guide.  
If possible, use surround back speakers. These speakers are important to take full advantage of all the sound  
channels on new, eight channel home theater DVDs. The diagram below also explains how to hook up a  
subwoofer which provides realistic bass sounds. For the subwoofer use a mono (single plug) RCA cord and for  
the other speakers use regular speaker cords. See pages 9192 for advice on speaker placem ent.  
Make sure you connect the speaker on the right to the R terminal and the speaker on the left to the L terminal.  
Also make sure the positive and negative (+/) terminals on the receiver match those on the speakers.  
Pow ered  
subw oofer  
Front  
speaker  
(Left)  
Front  
speaker  
(Right)  
TV/ m onitor  
Center  
speaker  
INPUT  
Surround  
speaker  
(Left)  
ASSGNABLE  
MONITOR OUT  
ASSIGNABLE  
PRE OUT  
PCM/  
2DIGITAL  
DTS  
AM LOOP  
/
FM UNBAL 75Ω  
ANTENNA  
Y
AC OUTLET  
SUB  
WOOFER  
CENTER  
Surround  
speaker  
(Right)  
IN  
OUT1  
OUT2  
CONTROL  
P
P
B
R
OUT  
FRONT  
R
MONITOR OUT  
R
L
L
1
(TV/  
IN  
PLAY  
IN  
SUR-  
(DVD/LD)  
1
IN  
ROUND  
SAT)  
IN  
Y
R
L
2
(CD-R/  
TAPE1)  
CD-R/  
IN  
CR1/  
VR  
(Single)  
TAPE1  
SUR-  
ROUND  
BACK  
R
OUT  
REC  
UT  
P
P
B
L
L
SPEAKERS  
FRONT  
3
(DVD/  
LD)  
PLAY  
IN  
SURROUND BACK  
/
IN  
ı
FRONT  
CENTER  
SURROUND  
IN  
R
Å
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
MD/  
CR2  
TAPE2  
SUR-  
4
2
(TV/SAT) IN  
IN  
ª
ª
ROUND  
OUT  
REC  
UT  
Y
(CD)  
R
L
CD  
IN  
SUB  
WOOF-  
ER  
CEN-  
TER  
V/  
AT  
IN  
P
P
B
DIGITAL  
LINE  
IN  
SUR-  
VD/  
D  
ROUND  
BACK  
·
·
R
IN  
R
L
R
L
R
L
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
MULTI CH IN  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
Surround back  
speaker (Left)  
Surround back  
speaker (Right)  
We recom m end speakers w ith a nom inal im pedance rated 8 -16 Ω, but you can change the  
speaker im pedance setting of the receiver (see page 25).  
m em o  
If you only have one surround back speaker hook it up to the left surround back terminal.  
If you use a THX certified subwoofer use the THX INPUT jack on the subwoofer (if your subwoofer  
has one) or switch the filter position to THX on your subwoofer.  
When you attached your speaker wire to the speaker terminal make sure that not even one strand  
of wire touches the back of the receiver. If this happens it could short out the receiver.  
7 Speaker term inals  
The speaker terminals also  
accept single banana plugs.  
(Refer to speaker manual for  
details.)  
2 Loosen speaker terminal  
3 Tighten  
1 Twist exposed wire  
and insert exposed wire.  
terminal.  
strands together  
tightly.  
3/8 in(10m m )  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ea s y S e t u p Gu id e P a rt 1  
3 Setting up the Main Unit  
1 Plug the AC pow er cord into a w all outlet.  
2 Press the  
STANDBY/ ON button to sw itch the receiver ON.  
4 Assigning the Digital Inputs  
This is only necessary if you did not hook up your DVD player to DIGITAL IN 3 using a coaxial cable but  
rather connected it to one of the optical digital inputs. The following example shows how to assign the  
DIGITAL IN 2 jack to DVD. Use the arrow buttons (5∞) and the ENTER button on the remote control to  
navigate the display on the receiver. Conversely, you can use the MULTI JOG dial and ENTER button on  
the front panel.  
4 DIGITAL-IN should be selected, if  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
TV CONT  
MULTI  
OPERATION  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
not use the 5∞ buttons to select  
it. Press the ENTER button.  
MULTI CONTROL  
DVD/LD  
VCR 2  
TV/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
INPUT  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
1
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE MUSIC  
DSP  
SB CH  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
SB CH  
MODE  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
STEREO/  
LS  
RS  
ENTER  
MIDNIGHT  
DIRECT  
MUTE  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
MENU TUNER EDIT  
TOP MENU  
GUIDE  
5 Use the 5∞ buttons to select  
TUNE  
2,7  
SYSTEM  
SETUP  
ST  
ST  
DIGI-2: CD-R and press ENTER.  
ENTER  
TUNE  
3-6  
AUDIO  
RETURN  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
CHANNEL−  
DTV ON/OFF BAND  
CHANNEL+  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
When you press ENTER, CD-R blinks.  
1 Turn on the receiver and your  
TV, press the RECEIVER button  
on the rem ote control.  
6 Use the 5∞ buttons to select  
DVD/ LD and press ENTER.  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
DSP  
SB CH  
2 Press the SYSTEM SETUP  
button.  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
7 Press the SYSTEM SETUP  
button.  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
This display appears on the receiver.  
The receiver exits the setup process.  
3 Looking at the display on your  
receiver, use the 5∞ buttons to  
select INPUT ASSIGN. Press the  
ENTER button.  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ea s y S e t u p Gu id e P a rt 2  
1 QUICK setup  
With this QUICK setup you can quickly and easily adjust the speakers settings so that you get enjoyable  
surround sound with minimum effort.  
You must have front and surround speakers hooked up to use this setup.  
You only need to do these settings once (unless you change the placement of your current speaker system or  
add new speakers, etc.).  
In each mode, the current settings are dis-  
played automatically. We suggest you adjust all  
these settings when you first hook up the  
receiver.  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
TV CONT  
MULTI  
OPERATION  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
MULTI CONTROL  
DVD/LD  
VCR 2  
TV/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
INPUT  
SUBWOOFER setting:  
If you connected a subwoofer select YES, if you  
1
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE MUSIC  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
SB CH  
MODE  
didnt select NO.  
STEREO/  
ENTER  
MIDNIGHT  
DIRECT  
MUTE  
CENTER SP setting:  
If you connected a CENTER speaker select YES,  
if you didnt select NO.  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
MENU TUNER EDIT  
TOP MENU  
GUIDE  
TUNE  
2,8  
SYSTEM  
SETUP  
ST  
ST  
SURRBACK SP setting:  
If you connected a SURROUND speaker(s) select  
YES, if you didnt select NO.  
ENTER  
TUNE  
3-7  
AUDIO  
RETURN  
CHANNEL−  
DTV ON/OFF BAND  
CHANNEL+  
ROOM SIZE setting:  
Tell the receiver your room size so it can equalize  
the speakers properly. Use the chart below for an  
approximate definition of the settings.  
S: 12 feet by 15 feet  
1 Press the RECEIVER button on  
the rem ote control.  
M: 18 feet by 20 feet  
L: 25 feet by 30 feet  
2 Press the SYSTEM SETUP  
button.  
LISTENING POSITION setting:  
This setting establishes where your ideal listen-  
ing position is. Choose from the three possibili-  
ties following the guide below.  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
FRONT: your listening position is closer to the  
front speakers.  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
CENTER: your listening position is equidistant  
from the front and surround speakers.  
REAR: your listening position is closer to the  
surround speakers.  
This display appears on the receiver.  
3 SURROUND SETUP should be  
selected, if not use the 5∞  
buttons to select it. Press the  
ENTER button.  
6 In a m enu use the 5∞ buttons to  
select the different settings.  
When you have the setting you  
w ant in a particular m enu, press  
ENTER.  
4 Use the 5∞ buttons to select  
QUICK. Press the ENTER button.  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
AUTO  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
MPEG AAC  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
RF  
DIGITAL  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
ANALOG STEREO  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF  
MUSIC  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 to change  
other m enus.  
5 Use the 5∞ buttons to navigate  
through the QUICK setup m enus.  
When you get a m enu you w ant  
to adjust press ENTER.  
8 Press the SYSTEM SETUP  
button.  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
The receiver exits the setup process.  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
When ENTER is pressed, the setting for each  
selected menu blinks.  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ea s y S e t u p Gu id e P a rt 2  
2 Playing a DVD w ith Surround Sound  
1 Make sure the receiver, your TV, your subw oofer and your DVD player  
are sw itched ON.  
2 Press the DVD/ LD button on the rem ote control.  
You should see DVD/LD in the display on the receiver.  
3 Play a DVD then adjust the MASTER VOLUME.  
To get a m ore refined sound, m ake the sound settings in "Expert setup" (starting on page  
79).  
m em o  
If you're having trouble getting surround sound playback look at this Frequently  
Asked Questions (FAQ) guide:  
Q1: Even though I'm playing a DVD I'm not getting 5.1 channel playback.  
A1: Either the DVD is not set for digital output, or the Dolby Digital/DTS output settings are not  
correct.  
Set the DVD player to output a digital signal and set the Dolby Digital and DTS output properly. If you are  
unsure how to do this check the DVD initial setup in the manual that came with your DVD player.  
Q2: There is no sound from the subwoofer or it is very low.  
A2: There is a good possibility you haven't reached a part of the DVD that has an LFE channel  
(which feeds the subwoofer) yet. The LFE channel only appears in selected parts of the  
soundtrack. Continue playing and listen for the subwoofer.  
If you want to hear more sound from the subwoofer set it to PLUS (see page 37 for more information and  
consult the memo on page 38).  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting Your Equipm ent  
Connecting your TV  
Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from  
the AC outlet.  
Connect your TV to the jacks as shown below. Hook up with either component video, S video, or compos-  
ite video cords (the quality descends in this order) but you m ust use the sam e type of video cords to  
hook up your DVD player (and all other video com ponents) as you use to hook up your TV. If you  
plan to hook up your DVD player with component video cords hook up your TV with them as well. Com-  
posite video cords, which look just like regular RCA audio cords (see page 19) but have only one cable are  
the most common.  
*The arrows  
indicate the  
direction of  
the signal.  
ASSIGNABLE  
MONITOR OUT  
ASSIGNABLE  
PRE OUT  
PCM/  
2DIGITAL /  
DTS  
AM LOOP  
FM UNBAL 75Ω  
ANTENNA  
Y
SUB  
WOOFER  
CENTER  
IN  
OUT1  
CONTROL  
TV/ m onitor  
PB  
PR  
Y
OUT  
OUT2  
FRONT  
R
MONITOR OUT  
R
L
L
1
(TV/  
IN  
PLAY  
IN  
SUR-  
(DVD/LD)  
1
IN  
ROUND  
SAT)  
IN  
R
L
2
(CD-R/  
TAPE1)  
CD-R/  
IN  
VCR1/  
DVR  
(Single)  
TAPE1  
SUR-  
ROUND  
BACK  
R
OUT  
REC  
OUT  
PB  
PR  
Y
L
L
VIDEO IN  
FRONT  
3
(DVD/  
LD)  
PLAY  
IN  
IN  
COMPO-  
NENT  
VIDEO  
IN  
R
MD/  
VCR2  
TAPE2  
SUR-  
Y
4
2
IN  
IN  
(TV/SAT)  
ROUND  
OUT  
REC  
OU
(CD)  
R
L
CD  
IN  
SUB  
WOOF-  
ER  
CEN-  
TER  
S-VIDEO  
P
B
R
TV/  
SA
IN  
PB  
PR  
DIGITAL  
LINE  
IN  
SUR-  
DV/  
LD  
P
ROUND  
BACK  
IN  
R
L
R
L
R
L
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
MULTI CH IN  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
S Vid e o  
Co m p o n e n t vid e o  
S video cables produce  
clearer picture  
reproduction by sending  
separate signals for the  
luminance and the color.  
The video signal is  
divided into the  
S VIDEO  
Y
luminance (Y) signal and  
the color (PB and PR)  
signals. In this way,  
interference between  
the signals is avoided.  
Green  
Blue  
PB  
PR  
Red  
Co m p o s it e Vid e o  
Composite video cords are the most common or standard video cord but also  
the lowest quality. The color on the connector is yellow to distinguish it from  
regular RCA audio cords which have white and red connectors (see page 19).  
It is important to use a true composite video cord and not an audio cord  
(though they look exactly the same) because the impedance is different and  
this will affect the picture quality.  
Com ponent Video Input Default Settings  
If you use component video cords to hook up your video equipment it is easiest to do so following the  
default settings, which are listed below. Remember you must use component video cords from your  
video source (for example, a DVD player) to the receiver and from the receiver to your TV (or monitor). If  
you don't follow the default settings below you must assign the inputs you used with the "Assigning the  
Component Video Inputs" procedure. See page 77 to do this.  
The default settings are:  
COMPONENT VIDEO IN 1: DVD/LD  
COMPONENT VIDEO IN 2: TV/SAT  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting Your Equipm ent  
Connecting Video Com ponents  
Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from  
the AC outlet.  
Connect your video components as shown on this and the following page. For video components (for  
example, a DVD player) there are two types of connections to make, video and audio.  
Hook up your video signal w ith either com ponent video, S video or com posite video cords (the  
quality descends in this order) but you m ust use the sam e type of cord as you used to hook up  
your TV.  
For the audio signal, in order to use digital soundtracks like Dolby Digital or DTS you must hook up a digital  
input, with either a coaxial or optical cord (see page 21). It is also a good idea to hook up your  
components with analog audio connections as well.  
If you want to record from your DVD player composite (or S video) cord connections and analog audio  
connections are necessary.  
Connecting a DVD player  
Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from  
the AC outlet.  
Hook up your audio signal with either a coaxial or optical digital cords (you don't need to do both). If you  
hook up your DVD/LD player using component video cable connections you might need to setup your  
DVD player for component video output as well. See your DVD manual for details. If you have a DVD-  
Audio or Super Audio CD (SACD) compatible player, see "Connecting to the Multi Channel Analog Inputs"  
on page 20.  
You need to hook up your audio with analog connections as well.  
*The arrows indicate the direction of the signal.  
DIGITAL OUT  
ASSIGNABLE  
MONITOR OUT  
ASSIGNABLE  
PRE OUT  
PCM/  
2DIGITAL /  
DTS  
AM LOOP  
FM UNBAL 75Ω  
1
2
ANTENNA  
Y
(not a PCM-only output)  
SUB  
WOOFER  
CENTER  
IN  
OUT1  
CONTROL  
3
PB  
OUT  
OUT2  
FRONT  
R
MONITOR OUT  
PR  
R
L
L
1
(TV/  
IN  
PLAY  
IN  
SUR-  
(DVD/LD)  
1
IN  
ROUND  
SAT)  
IN  
Y
R
L
2
(CD-R/  
TAPE1)  
CD-R/  
IN  
VCR1/  
DVR  
(Sngle)  
TAPE1  
VIDEO  
Y
SUR-  
ROUND  
BACK  
R
OUT  
REC  
OUT  
COMPO-  
NENT  
VIDEO  
OUT  
P
B
L
L
FRONT  
3
(DVD/  
LD)  
PLAY  
IN  
IN  
DVD player  
IN  
PR  
R
MD/  
VCR2  
TAPE2  
SUR-  
S-VIDEO  
4
2
IN  
IN  
(TV/SAT)  
ROUND  
P
P
B
R
OUT  
REC  
OUT  
Y
(CD)  
R
L
CD  
IN  
SUB  
WOOF-  
ER  
CEN-  
TER  
TV/  
SAT  
IN  
PB  
DIGITAL  
LINE  
IN  
SUR-  
DVD/  
LD  
ROUND  
BACK  
PR  
IN  
R
L
R
L
ANALOG  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
MULTI CH IN  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
L
R
m em o Be sure to m ake either a digital coaxial or digital optical connection (pictured as DIGITAL  
jack 3 or DIGITAL jack 2 in this diagram ) but you DON'T need to m ake both.  
• If your digital connections are different than the default settings you will need to assign  
the digital jacks to the proper com ponent(s) with the "Assigning the Digital Inputs"  
procedure. See page 76 to do this.  
• If your com ponent video connections are different from the default settings, you will  
need to assign them with "Assigning the Com ponent Video Inputs". See page 77 for how  
to do this.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting Your Equipm ent  
Connecting VCRs or DVRs  
Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from  
the AC outlet.  
Connect the video out of your VCR/DVR using either S video or composite video cords, depending on how  
you connected the receiver to your TV (see page 15). Use analog audio cords for the audio signal. To  
record, you also need to connect a set of audio/video outputs from the receiver to the audio/video inputs  
on your VCR/DVR. Note that to record video from a source component, the video connection from the  
source to the receiver and from the receiver to the recorder must be the same type.  
*The arrows indicate the direction of the signal.  
OUT  
IN  
AUDIO  
(PLAY)  
AUDIO  
(REC)  
L
L
ASSIGNABLE  
MONITOR OUT  
ASSIGNABLE  
PRE OUT  
PCM/  
2DIGITAL /  
DTS  
AM LOOP  
FM UNBAL 75Ω  
ANTENNA  
Y
R
R
SUB  
WOOFER  
CENTER  
IN  
OUT1  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
CONTROL  
P
P
B
OUT  
OUT2  
FRONT  
R
MONITOR OUT  
R
VCR 1/ DVR  
R
L
S-VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
L
1
(TV/  
IN  
PLAY  
IN  
SUR-  
(DVD/LD)  
1
IN  
ROUND  
SAT)  
IN  
Y
R
L
2
(CD-R/  
TAPE1)  
CD-R/  
IN  
VCR1/  
DVR  
(Single)  
TAPE1  
SUR-  
ROUND  
BACK  
R
OUT  
REC  
OUT  
P
P
B
L
L
FRONT  
3
(DVD/  
LD)  
PLAY  
IN  
IN  
IN  
R
OUT  
IN  
R
MD/  
VCR2  
TAPE2  
SUR-  
4
2
(TV/SAT) IN  
AUDIO  
(PLAY)  
AUDIO  
(REC)  
IN  
ROUND  
OUT  
REC  
OUT  
Y
(CD)  
R
L
CD  
IN  
SUB  
WOOF-  
ER  
CEN-  
TER  
L
R
L
R
TV/  
SAT  
IN  
P
P
B
DIGITAL  
LINE  
IN  
SUR-  
DVD/  
LD  
ROUND  
BACK  
R
IN  
R
L
R
L
R
L
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
MULTI CH IN  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
VCR 2  
S-VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
Connecting a Video Com ponent to the Front Panel  
Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from  
the AC outlet.  
Connect a portable DVD player, video game console or any video component to the front panel as show  
here. Front video connections are accessed via the front panel input selector as VIDEO  
*The arrows indicate the direction of the signal.  
STATING  
BAND  
CLASS  
SELECT  
MULTI J TER  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
VIDEO INPUT  
COLOR  
BRIGHT  
MONITOR  
AUDIO-IN/OUT  
VIDEO-IN/OUT  
PHONES  
ON/OFF  
HOLD  
DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL)  
Be careful! For portable DVD players you will need a  
specialized cord (for the audio) that has a m ini plug on  
one end and a regular plug on the other.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting Your Equipm ent  
Connecting Satellite TV (SAT) Com ponents  
Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from  
the AC outlet.  
Hook up the video signal with either component video, S video, or composite video cords, depending on  
how you connected the receiver to your TV (see page 15).  
For the audio signal, in order to use digital soundtracks broadcast you must hook up a digital input. Use  
either a coaxial or optical cable, it doesn't matter which (see page 21). We recommend hooking up your  
audio with analog cables as well (see below).  
*The arrows indicate the direction of the TV signal.  
VIDEO  
COMPO-  
NENT  
VIDEO  
OUT  
Y
S-VIDEO  
P
B
R
ASSIGNABLE  
MONITOR OUT  
ASSIGNABLE  
PRE OUT  
PCM/  
2DIGITAL /  
DTS  
P
AM LOOP  
FM UNBAL 75Ω  
ANTENNA  
Y
SUB  
WOOFER  
CENTER  
IN  
OUT1  
Satellite tuner  
CONTROL  
PB  
OUT  
OUT2  
FRONT  
R
ANALOG  
AUDIO  
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL  
MONITOR OUT  
PR  
R
L
L
1
(TV/  
IN  
PLAY  
IN  
SUR-  
(DVD/LD)  
1
IN  
ROUND  
SAT)  
IN  
Y
L
R
L
2
(CD-R
TAPE1
CD-R/  
IN  
VCR1/  
DVR  
(Single)  
TAPE1  
SUR-  
ROUND  
BACK  
R
OUT  
REC  
OUT  
PB  
R
L
L
FRONT  
3
(DVD/  
LD)  
PLAY  
IN  
IN  
IN  
PR  
R
MD/  
VCR2  
TAPE2  
SUR-  
4
2
(TV/SAT) IN  
IN  
ROUND  
OUT  
REC  
OUT  
Y
(CD)  
R
L
CD  
IN  
SUB  
WOOF-  
ER  
EN-  
TER  
TV/  
SAT  
IN  
PB  
DIGITAL  
LINE  
IN  
SUR-  
DVD/  
LD  
ROUND  
BACK  
PR  
IN  
R
L
R
L
R
L
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
MULTI CH IN  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
If your com ponent video connections are different from the default settings, you will  
need to assign them with "Assigning the Com ponent Video Inputs". See page 77 to do  
this.  
m em o  
If your digital connections are different than the default settings you will need to assign  
the digital jacks to the proper com ponent(s) with the "Assigning the Digital Inputs"  
procedure. See page 76 to do this.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting Your Equipm ent  
Connecting Analog Audio Com ponents  
Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from  
the AC outlet.  
Connect your audio components to the jacks as shown below. These are all analog connections and your  
analog audio components (turntable, cassette deck) use these jacks. Remember that for components you  
want to record with you need to hook up four plugs (a set of stereo ins and a set of stereo outs), but for  
components that only play (like a turntable) you only need to hook up one set of stereo plugs (two plugs).  
If you want to record to/from digital components (like a CD-R) to/from analog components you must hook  
up your digital equipment with these analog connections.  
*The arrows indicate the direction of the audio signal.  
ANALOG  
OUTPUT  
ASSIGNABLE  
PRE OUT  
L
PCM/  
2DIGITAL /  
DTS  
AM LOOP  
FM UNBAL 75Ω  
ANTENNA  
SUB  
WOOFER  
R
CENTER  
IN  
UT1  
CONTROL  
OUT  
CD player  
UT2  
FRONT  
R
MONITOR OUT  
R
L
L
1
TV/  
AT)  
N  
PLAY  
IN  
SUR-  
ANALOG  
ROUND  
OUTPUT  
INPUT  
IN  
(PLAY)  
(REC)  
R
L
2
CD-R/  
APE1)  
CD-R/  
N  
VCR1/  
DVR  
(Single)  
TAPE1  
SUR-  
L
L
ROUND  
BACK  
OUT  
REC  
OUT  
R
L
L
R
R
FRONT  
3
DVD/  
D)  
PLAY  
IN  
N  
IN  
R
MD/  
VCR2  
Recorder 1 (CD-R/ TAPE)  
TAPE2  
SUR-  
4
N  
ROUND  
OUT  
REC  
OUT  
CD)  
R
L
CD  
IN  
SUB  
WOOF-  
ER  
CEN-  
TER  
TV/  
SAT  
IN  
ANALOG  
OUTPUT  
INPUT  
(PLAY)  
(REC)  
DIGITAL  
LINE  
IN  
SUR-  
DVD/  
LD  
ROUND  
BACK  
L
L
IN  
R
L
R
L
R
L
VIDO  
S
VIDEO  
R
R
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
MULTI CH IN  
Recorder 2 (MD/ TAPE)  
Turntable (etc)  
7 Au d io c o rd s  
Use (RCA) audio cords (not supplied) to con-  
nect the audio components.  
If you use a turntable with this  
LINE IN jack only connect one  
with a built-in phono equalizer.  
Connect red plugs to  
R (right) and white  
plugs to L (left).  
L
Depending on where the cassette  
deck is placed, noise m ay occur  
during playback of your cassette  
deck which is caused by leakage flux  
from the transform er in the receiver.  
If you experience noise, m ove the  
cassette deck farther away from the  
receiver.  
m em o  
Be sure to insert  
completely.  
R
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting Your Equipm ent  
Connecting to the Multi Channel Analog Inputs (DVD-Audio or Super  
Audio CD (SACD) com patible player)  
Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from  
the AC outlet.  
If you have a DVD-Audio or Super Audio CD (SACD) compatible player, or are using an external Dolby  
Digital/DTS decoder, connect it to the multichannel analog inputs as shown below.  
ASSIGNABLE  
MONITOR OUT  
Com ponents equipped w ith  
5.1 (7.1) channel analog output jack  
ANALOG  
ASSIGNABLE  
PRE OUT  
PCM/  
2DIGITAL /  
DTS  
AM LOOP  
FM UNBAL 75Ω  
ANTENNA  
Y
SUB  
WOOFER  
CENTER  
IN  
OUT1  
CONTROL  
P
P
B
FRONT  
SURR-  
SUB  
SURR-  
CENTER  
OUT  
OUND  
WOOFER  
OUND BACK  
OUT2  
FRONT  
R
MONITOR OUT  
R
L
L
L
R
L
L
1
(TV/  
IN  
PLAY  
IN  
SUR-  
(DVD/LD)  
1
IN  
ROUND  
SAT)  
IN  
Y
R
R
R
R
L
2
(CD-R/  
CD-R/  
IN  
VCR1/  
DVR  
(Single)  
TAPE1  
SUR-  
ROUND  
BACK  
TAPE1)  
OUT  
REC  
OUT  
P
P
B
R
L
L
FRONT  
3
PLAY  
IN  
IN  
(DVD/  
LD)  
IN  
R
R
MD/  
VCR2  
TAPE2  
SUR-  
4
2
IN  
(TV/SAT) IN  
ROUND  
OUT  
REC  
OUT  
Y
(CD)  
R
L
CD  
IN  
SUB  
WOOF-  
ER  
CEN-  
TER  
TV/  
SAT  
IN  
P
P
B
DIGITAL  
LINE  
IN  
SUR-  
DVD/  
LD  
ROUND  
BACK  
R
IN  
R
L
R
L
R
L
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
MULTI CH IN  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
If you use only one surround back input, be sure to hook up to the SURROUND BACK Ò  
jack.  
m em o  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting Your Equipm ent  
Connecting Digital Audio Com ponents  
Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from  
the AC outlet.  
Connect your digital components as shown below. The VSX-43TX has two coaxial, two optical inputs for a  
total of four digital inputs. In order to use digital soundtracks like Dolby Digital or DTS (among others) you  
need to make digital audio connections. You can do this by either a coaxial or an optical connection (you  
dont need to do both). The quality of these two types of connections is the same but since some digital  
components only have one type of digital terminal, it is a matter of matching like with like (for example,  
the coaxial out from the component to coaxial in on the receiver).  
Hook up your digital equipment in accordance with this receiver's default settings (see next page) unless  
you want to, or need to, change them. To do this see "Assigning the Digital Inputs" on page 76.  
There are two optical digital out jacks (the CD recorder is connected to one in the diagram below). If you  
connect this to the optical input on a digital recorder (currently these include MD, DAT and CD-R) you can  
make direct digital recordings with this unit.  
We also recommend hooking up your digital components to analog audio jacks (see page 19) in order to  
make recordings because some digital sources may be protected against making digital copies.  
*The arrows indicate the direction of the audio signal.  
ASSIGNABLE  
PRE OUT  
PCM/  
2DIGITAL /  
DTS  
AM LOOP  
FM UNBAL 75Ω  
ANTENNA  
SUB  
WOOFER  
DIGITAL  
OUTPUT  
CENTER  
IN  
OUT1  
CONTROL  
OUT  
OUT2  
FRONT  
R
MONITOR OUT  
R
L
L
1
(TV/  
IN  
Satellite tuner  
CD recorder  
PLAY  
IN  
SUR-  
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL  
ROUND  
SAT)  
OUTPUT  
(PLAY)  
INPUT  
(REC)  
IN  
R
L
2
(CD-R/  
TAPE1)  
CD-R/  
IN  
VCR1/  
DVR  
(Single)  
TAPE1  
SUR-  
ROUND  
BACK  
R
OUT  
OUT  
L
L
FRONT  
3
(DVD/  
LD)  
PLAY  
IN  
IN  
IN  
R
MD/  
VCR2  
TAPE2  
SUR-  
4
IN  
ROUND  
OUT  
REC  
OUT  
(CD)  
DIGITAL  
R
L
OUTPUT  
SUB  
WOOF-  
ER  
CEN-  
TER  
D  
IN  
TV/  
SAT  
IN  
DIGITAL  
LINE  
IN  
SUR-  
DVD/  
LD  
ROUND  
BACK  
IN  
R
L
R
L
R
L
VIDEO  
S VIDEO  
DVD player  
CD player  
MULTI CH IN  
ADIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
(not a PCM-only output)  
DIGITAL  
OUTPUT  
7 Coaxial cords/ Optical cables  
Coaxial cord  
(or standard [com posite]  
video cord)  
Optical cable  
Commercially available digital audio coaxial  
cords (standard video cords can also be used) or  
optical cables (not supplied) are used to connect  
digital components to this receiver.  
Be sure to insert completely and in the case of  
the optical cable, right-side up. If it is inserted  
improperly it can break the shutter on the  
optical terminal (this won't, however, affect the  
connection or insertion of an optical cable).  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting Your Equipm ent  
Digital Input Default Settings  
Unlike analog connections, the jacks for digital connections are not dedicated to one type of component,  
they can be used freely. Thus you must tell the receiver what digital component is connected to which  
jack so your components will be in sync with the names on the remote control buttons and the like. To  
avoid having to assign the digital inputs you can hook up your equipment in accordance with the receiver's  
default settings.  
The default settings are:  
DIGITAL IN 1 (optical): TV/SAT  
DIGITAL IN 2 (optical): CD-R/TAPE1  
DIGITAL IN 3 (coaxial): DVD/LD  
DIGITAL IN 4 (coaxial): CD  
See "Assigning the Digital Inputs" on page 76 if the way you hook up your equipment is different from the  
default settings listed above.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting Your Equipm ent  
Connecting the Radio Antennas  
Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from  
the AC outlet.  
Connect the supplied FM wire antenna and the AM loop antenna to the ANTENNA terminals as shown  
below. These antennas should provide adequate reception quality in most cases, but connecting outdoor  
antennas should noticeably improve sound quality.  
FM w ire  
AM loop  
antenna  
antenna  
ASSIGNABLE  
MONITOR OUT  
ASSIGNABLE  
PRE OUT  
PCM/  
2DIGITAL /  
DTS  
AM LOOP  
FM UNBAL 75Ω  
ANTENNA  
Y
AC OUTLET  
SUB  
WOOFER  
CENTER  
IN  
OUT1  
CONTROL  
P
P
B
OUT  
OUT2  
FRONT  
R
MONITOR OUT  
R
R
L
L
1
(TV/  
IN  
PLAY  
IN  
SUR-  
(DVD/LD)  
1
IN  
ROUND  
SAT)  
IN  
Y
R
L
2
(CD-R/  
TAPE1)  
CD-R/  
IN  
VCR1/  
DVR  
(Single)  
TAPE1  
SUR-  
ROUND  
7 AM lo o p a n t e n n a  
2 Twist exposed wire strands  
3 Attach to a wall, etc. (if  
desired) and face toward  
the direction providing  
the best reception.  
1 Assem ble the antenna.  
together and insert.  
3/8 in. (10 mm)  
Using outdoor antennas  
7 To im prove FM reception  
Connect an external FM antenna.  
7 To im prove AM reception  
Connect a 15 to 18 feet (5 6 meter) length of vinyl-coated  
wire to the AM LOOP ANTENNA terminal in addition to the  
supplied AM loop antenna.  
For best possible reception, suspend horizontally outdoors.  
Outdoor antenna  
AM loop antenna  
1518 ft. (56 m )  
Indoor antenna  
(vinyl-coated w ire)  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting Your Equipm ent  
Connecting Speakers  
Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from  
the AC outlet.  
We recommend a full complement of seven speakers and a subwoofer as shown here but, naturally,  
everyone's home setup will vary. Simply connect the speakers you have in the manner described below.  
One of the latest features of home theater is the use of surround back speakers. These speakers add  
even greater realism in movie sound effects and some new discs with soundtracks in Dolby Digital or DTS  
incorporate these channels. See the page 26 for speaker placement.  
In general, make sure you connect the speaker on the right to the R terminal and the speaker on the left  
to the L terminal. Also make sure the positive and negative (+/) terminals on the receiver match those on  
the speakers.  
We recom m end speakers w ith a nom inal im pedance rated 8 -16 Ω, but you can change the  
speaker im pedance setting of the receiver (see page 25).  
m em o  
If you only have one surround back speaker hook it up to the left surround back term inal.  
If you use a THX certified subwoofer use the THX INPUT jack on the subwoofer (if your  
subwoofer has one) or switch the filter position to THX on your subwoofer.  
Pow ered  
subw oofer  
Front  
speaker  
(Left)  
Front  
speaker  
(Right)  
TV/ m onitor  
Center  
speaker  
INPUT  
Surround  
speaker  
(Left)  
ASSGNABLE  
MONITOR OUT  
ASSIGNABLE  
PRE OUT  
PCM/  
2DIGITAL  
DTS  
AM LOOP  
/
FM UNBAL 75Ω  
ANTENNA  
Y
AC OUTLET  
SUB  
WOOFER  
CENTER  
Surround  
speaker  
(Right)  
IN  
OUT1  
OUT2  
CONTROL  
P
P
B
R
OUT  
FRONT  
R
MONITOR OUT  
R
L
L
1
(TV/  
IN  
PLAY  
IN  
SUR-  
(DVD/LD)  
1
IN  
ROUND  
SAT)  
IN  
Y
R
L
2
(CD-R/  
TAPE1)  
CD-R/  
IN  
VCR1/  
DVR  
(Single)  
TAPE1  
SUR-  
ROUND  
BACK  
R
OUT  
REC  
OUT  
P
P
B
L
L
SPEAERS  
FRONT  
3
(DVD/  
LD)  
PLAY  
IN  
SURROUND BACK  
/
IN  
ı
FRONT  
CENTER  
SURROUND  
IN  
R
Å
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
MD/  
VCR2  
TAPE2  
SUR-  
4
2
(TV/SAT) IN  
IN  
ª
ª
ROUND  
OUT  
REC  
OUT  
Y
(CD)  
R
L
CD  
IN  
SUB  
WOOF-  
ER  
CEN-  
TER  
TV/  
SAT  
IN  
P
P
B
DIGITAL  
LINE  
IN  
SUR-  
DVD/  
LD  
ROUND  
BACK  
·
·
R
IN  
R
L
R
L
R
L
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
MULTI CH IN  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
Surround back  
speaker (Left)  
Surround back  
speaker (Right)  
7 Speaker term inals  
The speaker terminals also  
accept single banana plugs.  
(Refer to speaker manual  
for details.)  
2 Loosen speaker terminal  
3 Tighten  
terminal.  
1 Twist exposed wire  
strands tightly  
together.  
and insert exposed wire.  
3/8 in(10m m )  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting Your Equipm ent  
Speaker im pedance  
You can change the speaker impedance for VSX-43TX but we recommend using speakers with an imped-  
ance of 8 -16 (the default setting). If you are using 6 - less than 8 impedance speakers, you need  
to change the impedance setting. Use any speaker rated between 6 -16 .  
STANDBY/ON  
SPEAKERS  
First put the receiver in STANDBY m ode, then  
AUDIO/  
V
press the pow er button w hile holding dow n the  
SPEAKERS button.  
STANDBY/ ON  
S
TAN  
D
B
Y
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
The receiver will reset to the new impedance  
setting. With this method you can choose the 8 -  
16 setting or the 6 -8 setting.  
MULTI  
J
OG  
MULTI  
J
OG CONTROL  
RETURN  
STATION TUNING  
TUNER  
EDI  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
FL DIMMER  
MIDNIGHT  
LOUDNESS  
BAND  
CLASS  
SELECT  
T
MULTI J OG/ ENTER  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/ TREBLE  
P
HONES  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
I
NPUT  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
To check which impedance setting  
to hold down the SPEAKERS  
button for 2-3 seconds. You'll get  
a display like these telling you the  
speaker impedance setting.  
(This display indicates an  
8-16im pedance setting.)  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
(This display indicates a 6-  
less than 8im pedance  
setting.)  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
Bi-w iring your speakers  
This high quality but difficult m ethod of wiring speakers will be  
unnecessary for m ost users. In order to do this your speakers m ust be  
bi-wireable (that is they m ust have separate term inals for the high and  
low frequencies).  
To bi-wire a speaker, connect two sets of speaker cords to each  
speaker term inal on the receiver. The easiest way to do this is to  
connect one wire in the norm al way, and use a banana plug for the  
other one. Make sure you use a parallel (not series) connection when  
doing so. Don't connect different speakers from the sam e term inal in  
this way.  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting Your Equipm ent  
Placing Your Speakers  
Proper speaker placement is essential to realize the best sound from your system. The diagram and tips  
given here are just a rough guide, for more information see pages 91 & 92. Also, it is very important for  
speaker placement to read the instructions that come with your speakers so please be sure to do so.  
Speaker placem ent  
If you have a multiple speaker arrangement the placement of the speakers is extremely important. To  
achieve the best possible surround sound, install your speakers as shown below. Make sure all speakers  
are installed securely to prevent accidents and improve sound quality. Some speakers are designed to be  
floor-standing but others benefit greatly from speaker stands which raise them off the floor. Be sure to  
read your speaker manuals for the best placement of the speakers.  
Center Speaker  
When installing speakers near the  
TV, we recommend using  
m em o  
Front Speaker  
(L)  
Front Speaker  
magnetically shielded speakers to  
prevent distortion in the color of  
the TV screen. If you do not have  
magnetically shielded speakers  
and notice discoloration of the TV  
screen, place the speakers farther  
away from the TV.  
(R)  
Subwoofer  
Install the center speaker above or  
below the TV so that the sound of  
the center channel is localized at  
the TV screen.  
Surround  
Speaker (L)  
Surround  
Speaker (R)  
THX recommends that if you have  
two surround back speakers place  
them close together.  
Surround Back  
Speaker (L)  
Surround Back  
Speaker (R)  
CAUTION:  
When installing the center speaker on top of the TV, be sure to secure it with suitable means.  
AC Pow er Cord  
Plug in the power cord to a wall outlet after you have finished hooking up the rest of your equipment.  
CAUTION!  
The equipment should be disconnected by removing the mains plug from the wall socket when not in  
regular use, e.g. when on vacation.  
AC Outlet [sw itched 100 W m ax]  
Power supplied through this outlet is turned on and off by this units STANDBY/ON button. Total electrical  
power consumption of connected equipment should not exceed 100 W.  
CAUTION!  
Do not connect appliances with high power consumption such as heaters, irons, or television sets to the  
AC OUTLET in order to avoid overheating or fire risk. This can cause the amplifier to malfunction.  
DO NOT CONNECT A MONITOR OR TV SET TO THIS UNIT’S AC OUTLET.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Displays & Controls  
Display  
All the display information is explained and/or referenced here.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DIGITAL  
RF  
DIGITAL  
ANALOG  
DTS ES EX  
MPEG AAC  
STEREO  
DSP  
ON MOVIE  
SB CH  
AUTO  
MUSIC  
OFF  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
1
SIGNAL SELECT indicators  
Light to indicate the input signal you selected.  
9
Hi-BIT/ SAMPLING indicator  
Lights when a HI-BIT/SAMPLING mode is on.  
AUTO: Lights when the receiver is set to select  
the audio input signal automatically.  
DIGITAL: Lights when digital audio signals are  
selected.  
ANALOG: Lights when analog audio signals are  
selected.  
10 DSP indicators  
MOVIE: Lights when a MOVIE mode is  
selected. When a DSP MOVIE mode is select-  
ed DSP will light with a box around it.  
MUSIC: Lights when a MUSIC mode is  
selected. When a DSP MUSIC mode is select-  
ed DSP will light with a box around it.  
2
Digital form at indicators  
PRO LOGIC II: Lights during Dolby Pro Logic,  
Dolby Pro Logic II processing.  
11 Program Form at indicators  
NEO:6: Lights during NEO:6 processing.  
2 DIGITAL: Lights when a Dolby Digital signal is  
detected.  
DTS: Lights when a DTS signal is detected.  
ES: Lights when playing back a DTS ES signal.  
EX: Lights when playing back a Dolby Digital EX  
signal.  
For Dolby Digital or DTS sources : These  
indicators change according to which channels  
are active in the source. When all three LS (left  
surround), S (surround) and RS (right surround)  
light at the same time it means a source with a  
6.1 channel playback flag is being used.  
L – Left front channel.  
C – Center channel.  
R – Right front channel.  
LS – Left surround channel.  
S – Surround channel or Surround back channel.  
RS – Right surround channel.  
LFE – Low Frequency Effects channel.  
STEREO: Lights during two-channel playback.  
3
4
5
6
7
LOUDNESS indicator  
Lights when LOUDNESS is on.  
MIDNIGHT indicator  
Lights when MIDNIGHT is on.  
TONE indicator  
Lights when the TONE control is on.  
Lights when LFE signal is input.  
12 SB CH indicators  
DNR indicator  
Lights when DIGITAL NR is on.  
Light to indicate the status of the surround  
back channels.  
TUNER indicators  
STEREO: Lights when an FM stereo broadcast  
is received in the auto stereo mode.  
AUTO – Lights when the SB CH MODE or  
VIRTUAL SURROUND BACK mode is set to  
AUTO.  
MONO: Lights when the tuner is set to receive  
FM broadcasts and when MPX mode is selected.  
ON – Lights when the SB CH MODE or  
VIRTUAL SURROUND BACK mode is set to  
ON.  
TUNED: Lights when a broadcast is received.  
OFF – Lights when the SB CH MODE or  
VIRTUAL SURROUND BACK mode is set to  
OFF.  
8
Volum e level indicator  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Displays & Controls  
Front Panel  
All the controls on the front panel are explained and/or referenced here. To open the front panel push  
gently on the lower third of the panel.  
3
9
10 11  
1
2
4 5  
6
7
8
AUDIO/ VIDEO M ULTI-CHAN N EL RECEIVER VS X-4  
3
TX  
STANDBY/ ON  
S
TAN DBY  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
STEREO/ DIRECT MULTI CH IN  
ACOUSTIC EQ  
MULTI J OG  
MASTER VOLUME  
STATION TUNING  
MULTI J OG CONTROL  
TUNER  
EDIT  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
MIDNIGHT  
LOUDNESS  
BAND  
CLASS  
SET UP  
RETURN  
SELECT  
MULTI J OG/ ENTER  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/ TREBLE  
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
VIDEO INPUT  
13  
14 15 16 17  
18  
12  
STATION TUNING  
MULTI J OG CONTROL  
TUNER  
EDIT  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
MIDNIGHT  
LOUDNESS  
SET UP  
RETURN  
BAND  
CLASS  
SELECT  
MULTI J OG/ ENTER  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/ TREBLE  
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
VIDEO INPUT  
L
AUDIO  
R
20  
22  
19  
21  
1
MULTI J OG dial  
STEREO/ DIRECT (see page 43): Switches  
the receiver into STEREO mode if it was in a  
different sound mode or toggles between  
DIRECT and STEREO mode.  
You can use this dial for many purposes. When  
you press the SET UP button (12), you can use  
it to perform SYSTEM SETUP operations;  
select a function (like a DVD) or a listening  
mode (like Dolby Pro logic ll) or do TUNER EDIT  
functions (in TUNER mode).  
DIRECT playback bypasses the tone controls  
and channel level for the most accurate  
reproduction of a program source.  
2
3
STANDBY/ ON button  
Press to switch the receiver ON or into  
STANDBY mode.  
4
ENTER button  
Use this button to enter information concerning  
the SYSTEM SETUP, listening mode or the  
tuner.  
Listening m ode buttons (see pages 43-  
45)  
There are tw o types of SURROUND m odes:  
5
STANDBY indicator  
Lights when the receiver is in STANDBY mode.  
(Please note that this receiver consumes a  
small amount of power [0.6 W] in the standby  
mode.)  
MOVIE: Press to put the receiver into MOVIE  
listening mode (see page 44).  
MUSIC: Press to put the receiver into MUSIC  
listening mode (see page 45).  
6
Rem ote sensor  
Receives the signals from the remote control.  
7
8
Display (See page 27)  
MCACC indicator (see page 47)  
Lights when the ACOUSTIC CAL EQ is on.  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Displays & Controls  
9
MULTI CH IN button  
18 TUNER CONTROL buttons (See page  
54-58)  
Use this button to select the component you  
have hooked up to the MULTI CH IN terminals  
(for example, a DVD-Audio player).  
BAND  
Press to select the AM or FM band.  
10 ACOUSTIC EQ button (see page 47)  
Use to switch on and off the Acoustic Calibra-  
tion EQ.  
CLASS  
Press repeatedly to switch the preset station  
classes.  
11 MASTER VOLUME dial  
SELECT  
Use to raise or lower the volume of the receiver.  
Switches the –/+ buttons between station  
memory and frequency select modes.  
12 MULTI J OG CONTROL buttons  
SET UP  
/ +  
Press to switch the SYSTEM SETUP mode.  
Selects station memories or frequencies when  
using the tuner.  
RETURN  
Press to move back one step in the SYSTEM  
TUNER EDIT  
SETUP process.  
Press to memorize and name a station for recall  
using the MULTI JOG and ENTER buttons.  
13 SIGNAL SELECT button (see page 42)  
Press SIGNAL SELECT repeatedly to select one  
of the following:  
19 PHONES jack  
Connect headphones for private listening (no  
sound will be heard through the speakers).  
AUTO If there are analog and digital signals  
input, the receiver automatically selects the  
digital signal.  
20 SPEAKERS (A/ B) button  
The use of this button depends on how the  
SURRBACK SYSTEM (see page 35) are set. If  
NORMAL SYSTEM is chosen this button  
toggles between A and OFF. If SECOND ZONE  
is chosen this button toggles between A, B,  
A+B and OFF (see page 66). If FRONT BI-AMP  
is chosen this button toggles between A+B and  
OFF (see page 66).  
DIGITAL To select an optical or coaxial  
digital signal.  
ANALOG To select an analog signal.  
14 HI-BIT HI-SAMPLING button (see page  
50)  
Use this button to switch the HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING on or off. Use to hear CD and  
DVD, as well as other digital soundtracks at a  
wider dynamic range, allowing for finer audio  
reproduction.  
21 TONE CONTROL buttons (see page 49)  
TONE button  
This button switches between TONE ON and  
TONE BYPASS, which bypasses the tone  
circuitry.  
15 SB CH MODE button (see pages 51)  
Use this button to turn the surround back  
channels ON/OFF/AUTO or switch the VIRTU-  
AL SURROUND BACK mode between ON/  
OFF/AUTO.  
BASS/ TREBLE button  
Use to select whether the bass or treble will be  
adjusted.  
/ + buttons  
Use to adjust the frequency levels.  
16 MIDNIGHT button (See page 48)  
Switches the MIDNIGHT mode on or off  
(cannot be used in THX CINEMA mode).  
22 VIDEO INPUT jacks (see page 17)  
17 LOUDNESS button (see page 48)  
Switches the LOUDNESS mode on or off (for  
all modes except THX CINEMA and MULTI CH  
IN).  
S-VIDEO  
Video input for connecting a portable DVD  
player, video camera (etc.), that has an S video  
out.  
RCA VIDEO / AUDIO (L/ R)  
Video input for connecting a portable DVD  
player, video camera, etc., that has standard  
RCA video/audio outputs.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Displays & Controls  
Rem ote Control  
This page describes the buttons on the remote control used to operate the receiver.  
ENTER: Use this button to enter information  
concerning the listening modes.  
9
0
-
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
MULTI  
OPERATION  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
STEREO/ DIRECT: Switches the receiver into  
STEREO mode if it was in a different listening  
mode or toggles between DIRECT and STE-  
REO mode (see page 43).  
1
2
MULTI CONTROL  
DVD/LD  
VCR 2  
TV/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
TV CONT  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
INPUT  
=
~
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE MUSIC  
4 SYSTEM SET UP button  
Use for all system setups, including the  
speaker and sound systems. For more informa-  
tion see. Setting up for Surround Sound“  
starting on page 34. When in TUNER control  
mode this functions as TUNER EDIT, and in  
DVD control mode, MENU functions.  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
SB CH  
MODE  
3
STEREO/  
ENTER  
MIDNIGHT  
DIRECT  
MUTE  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
!
@
#
MENU TUNER EDIT  
TOP MENU  
GUIDE  
4
TUNE  
SYSTEM  
SETUP  
5 AUDIO button  
ST  
ST  
ENTER  
TUNE  
Use to switch the audio tracks of a DVD when  
in DVD mode.  
AUDIO  
RETURN  
5
6
$
6 Com m and button for other com ponents  
(see pages 6162)  
CHANNEL−  
DTV ON/OFF BAND  
CHANNEL+  
Use these buttons to control other components  
you selected with the MULTI CONTROL  
buttons. You must input the preset code in  
order use this function (see page 59).  
D.ACCESS  
MPX  
CLASS  
DIMMER  
SIGNAL SEL  
VIDEO SEL  
LOUDNESS  
DNR  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
ENTER  
BASS/TREBLE  
DISC  
7
8
7 Num ber buttons  
+
HI-BIT  
+10  
These can be used for many purposes depend-  
ing on the mode of the remote control.  
TV CONTROL  
CHANNEL  
SUB TITLE  
%
^
REMOTE  
SETUP  
VOLUME  
When the RECEIVER button is pressed, you  
enter the receiver mode and the buttons  
operate as below:  
DIMMER (see page 53)  
Use to adjust the brightness of the receiver's  
display.  
RECEIVER  
LOUDNESS button (see page 48)  
Switches the LOUDNESS mode on or off (for  
all modes except THX CINEMA and MULTI CH  
IN).  
1
RECEIVER (STANDBY/ ON) button  
Press to turn power of the receiver on or to  
standby (off).  
2 MULTI CONTROL buttons  
These buttons are the basic controls that  
switch the mode of the receiver and the  
remote control, which allows you to control  
your other components.  
TONE buttons (see page 49)  
This button switches between TONE ON and  
TONE BYPASS, which bypasses the tone  
circuitry.  
SIGNAL SEL button (see page 42)  
Press SIGNAL SEL repeatedly to select one of  
the following:  
TV CONT: Press so that the remote control can  
operate the TV control commands.  
3 Listening m ode buttons (see page 43-  
45)  
AUTO If there are analog and digital signals  
input, the receiver automatically selects the  
digital signal.  
SURROUND buttons (MOVIE, MUSIC, | \  
& ENTER):  
MOVIE: Press to put the receiver into MOVIE  
listening mode (see page 44).  
MUSIC: Press to put the receiver into MUSIC  
listening mode (see page 45).  
DIGITAL To select an optical or coaxial  
digital signal.  
ANALOG To select an analog signal.  
30  
| \: Use to select the MOVIE or MUSIC  
listening mode.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Displays & Controls  
DNR (DIGITAL NR) button (see page 47)  
Switches the DIGITAL NR on or off (for all  
modes except THX CINEMA and MULTI CH IN).  
~ RECEIVER control buttons  
ACOUSTIC EQ button (see page 47)  
Use to switch on and off the Acoustic Calibra-  
tion EQ.  
BASS/ TREBLE button (see page 49)  
Use to select whether the bass or treble will be  
adjusted.  
SB CH MODE button (see pages 51)  
Use this button to turn the surround back  
channels ON/OFF/AUTO or switch the VIRTU-  
AL SURROUND BACK mode between ON/  
OFF/AUTO.  
VIDEO SEL button (see page 53)  
Use to toggle between the different video input  
possibilities.  
HI-BIT button (see page 50)  
MIDNIGHT button (see page 48)  
Switches the MIDNIGHT listening mode on or  
off (for all modes except THX CINEMA and  
MULTI CH IN).  
Use this button to switch the HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING on or off. Use to hear CD and  
DVD, as well as other digital soundtracks at a  
wider dynamic range, allowing for finer audio  
reproduction.  
INPUT button  
Press to select an input source. The button will  
(+/ ) buttons  
cycle through all the possible sources.  
Use to adjust the TONE level, effect level and  
channel level as well as make Dolby Pro Logic  
II MUSIC parameter settings.  
MULTI CH INPUT button (see page 50)  
Use this button to select the component you  
have hooked up to the MULTI CH IN terminals  
(for example, a DVD-Audio player).  
EFFECT/ CH SEL button  
Switches between the different channels so  
you can add volume individually to each  
channel with the + and buttons. Also selects  
EFFECT mode of Pioneer original sound modes  
and Dolby Pro Logic II MUSIC parameter  
settings. You can then use the + and buttons  
to make these adjustments.  
MUTE button  
Press to mute or restore the volume.  
! MASTER VOLUME (/ +) buttons  
Use to raise or lower the volume of the receiver.  
@ TOP MENU/ GUIDE button  
Use to find stations or menus on a digital TV  
tuner. For a DVD player use this button to bring  
up the DVD menu.  
8 TV CONTROL buttons  
The following buttons are used to control the TV  
only and can be used once they are preset to  
control your TV.  
# 5˜∞˜2˜3˜ENTER buttons  
These buttons can be used for a variety of  
operations in the SYSTEM SETUP menu.  
: This is a dedicated TV button. Use it to turn on/  
off your TV.  
INPUT SELECT: Press to select the input  
source for the TV.  
CHANNEL +/ : Use these buttons to change  
the channel of the TV.  
VOLUME +/ : Press to control the volume of  
the TV.  
These buttons are used to control the menus  
for other components when in those modes  
(DVD, digital TV tuner, satellite tuner, cable  
tuner, etc.). In TUNER mode, they can select a  
station and/or a frequency.  
$ RETURN button  
9 MULTI OPERATION button  
When you are in a receiver setup operation this  
button will go back one step in the SYSTEM  
SETUP procedure. When you are using your  
DVD menu screen this button acts the same as  
the DVD player's "Return" button. When you  
are using cable tuners, satellite tuners or digital  
TV tuners this button will either exit you from  
the menu screen or act like a "Return" button  
above, depending on the maker of the unit.  
Use this button to start the MULTI OPERATION  
mode. See pages 6869 for how to program  
and use the MULTI OPERATION mode.  
0 LED DISPLAY  
This display flashes when a command is sent  
from the remote control to the receiver. It also  
flashes at other times, for example when  
teaching the receiver preset codes.  
% SUBTITLE button  
- SOURCE button  
Use to switch the subtitles on a DVD player or  
disc.  
Use this button to turn on or off other compo-  
nents. You must input the preset code in order  
to use this function (see page 59).  
^ REMOTE SETUP button.  
Use to customize the remote control functions  
and the remote control itself. (See Setting Up  
Remote Control to Control Other Components“  
starting on page 59).  
= RECEIVER button  
Use this button to switch the remote control  
into receiver mode in order to get certain  
receiver functions or do receiver setups.  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Displays & Controls  
Back Panel  
All the terminals on the back panel are explained and/or referenced here.  
1 2  
3
4
5
6
ASSIGNABLE  
PRE OUT  
PCM/  
2DIGITAL /  
DTS  
AM LOOP  
FM UNBAL 75  
ANTENNA  
SUB  
WOOFER  
CENTER  
IN  
OUT1  
CONTROL  
OUT  
OUT2  
FRONT  
R
MONITOR OUT  
R
L
L
1
(TV/  
IN  
PLAY  
IN  
SUR-  
ROUND  
SAT)  
IN  
R
L
2
(CD-R/  
TAPE1)  
CD-R/  
IN  
VCR1/  
DVR  
(Single)  
TAPE1  
SUR-  
ROUND  
BACK  
R
OUT  
REC  
OUT  
L
L
FRONT  
PLAY  
IN  
3
(DVD/  
LD)  
IN  
IN  
R
MD/  
VCR2  
TAPE2  
SUR-  
4
IN  
ROUND  
OUT  
REC  
OUT  
(CD)  
R
L
SUB  
WOOF-  
ER  
CEN-  
TER  
CD  
IN  
TV/  
SAT  
IN  
DIGITAL  
LINE  
IN  
SUR-  
DVD/  
LD  
ROUND  
BACK  
IN  
R
L
R
L
R
L
VIDEO  
S VIDEO  
MULTI CH IN  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
10 11 12  
1
DIGITAL IN term inals (see page 2122)  
Use these terminals to input the signal from a  
DVD, CD player or any other kind of digital  
player. To be able to play Dolby Digital and  
other surround soundtracks you need to make  
digital connections. To do this use the digital  
terminals here. If you don't connect as per the  
default settings (see page 22) you need to  
complete "Assigning the Digital Inputs" (see  
page 76).  
4
Radio antenna term inals (see page 23)  
Hook up antennas for the radio tuner built into  
the receiver here.  
5
MONITOR OUT term inals (connect a TV  
or m onitor here, see page 15)  
Use these terminals to output a video signal to  
a TV or monitor.  
6
7
PRE OUT analog term inals (connect an  
am plifier here, see page 67)  
Use these terminals to output the audio signal  
from this amplifier to a different amplifier if  
that's how you choose to set up your system.  
2
3
DIGITAL OUT term inals (see page 21)  
Use these terminals to output a digital signal to  
a DVD-R, CD-R, MD recorder or any other kind  
of digital recorder.  
COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT  
term inals (connect a TV or m onitor  
here, see page 15)  
Use these terminals to output the video signal  
from the COMPONENT VIDEO IN terminals to  
your TV. See #13 for more information.  
CONTROL IN/ OUT term inal (see page  
71)  
You can use this jack to hook up other  
PIONEER equipment, that has a CONTROL  
terminal, so that you can control them all by  
pointing the remote control(s) at one remote  
sensor.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Displays & Controls  
7
8
9
ASSIGNABLE  
MONITOR OUT  
Y
AC OUTLET  
P
P
B
R
(DVD/LD)  
1
IN  
Y
P
P
B
SPEAKERS  
SURROUND BACK /  
ı
FRONT  
CENTER  
SURROUND  
R
Å
R
L
R
L
R
L
2
(TV/SAT) IN  
ª
ª
Y
P
P
B
·
·
R
COMPONENT VIDEO  
13  
8
SPEAKERS term inals (see page 24)  
11 Video com ponents input/ output  
term inals  
Use these terminals to connect speakers to the  
receiver. The FRONT, CENTER and SUR-  
ROUND terminals are for the main speaker  
system and the SURROUND BACK speakers  
can be set to either the main system, the  
SECOND ZONE or the FRONT BI-AMP setting.  
See page 65 to set the SURROUND BACK  
speakers.  
Input/output signals from your video compo-  
nents (DVD, VCR, TV tuners, SAT tuners, etc.)  
here. (see page 1618).  
12 MULTI CH IN term inals (see page 20)  
Use these terminals to input a multichannel  
surround signal (for example, a DVD-Audio  
signal) in an analog fashion. These are analog  
jacks.  
9
AC OUTLET (sw itced 100 W m ax)  
Hook up an external component to the power  
supply of this receiver. Only do this with audio  
or video components being used in this system  
and never hook up heavy equipment (like TVs,  
heaters, air conditioners, refrigerators, etc.) to  
this receiver.  
13 COMPONENT VIDEO IN term inals (see  
page 1518)  
Use these terminals to hook up the video  
connections of your video components with  
this high quality method. Your components will  
have to have the terminals as well to take  
advantage of this kind of connection. If you  
don't connect as per the default settings (see  
page 15) you need to complete "Assigning the  
Component Video Inputs" (see page 77).  
10 Audio input/ output term inals (connect  
analog com ponents here, see page 19)  
Use these terminals to input/output the audio  
signal from analog components (like a cassette  
deck or turntable). These are analog jacks.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up for Surround Sound  
To ensure the best possible surround sound, complete the following setup operations. Some of these are the  
same (and take precedence over) the settings you made in the Easy Setup Guide, so consider if the ones you  
made at that time were adequate. If you feel they were, move on to the next setting here.  
Use the arrow buttons (5∞) and the ENTER button on the remote control to navigate the display on the  
receiver. Conversely, you can use the MULTI JOG dial and ENTER button on the front panel.  
4 Use the 5∞ buttons to navigate  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
MULTI  
OPERATION  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
through the m enus. When you  
have the setting you w ant in a  
particular m enu, press ENTER.  
In each mode, the current settings are displayed.  
We suggest you do a basic system setup for  
surround sound when you first hook up the  
receiver. That gets it out of the way and you won't  
need to do it again unless you change your home  
set up (by adding new speakers, etc.). To do a  
basic setup use SURRBACK and NORMAL setups  
below.  
MULTI CONTROL  
DVD/LD  
VCR 2  
TV/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
TV CONT  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
INPUT  
1
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE MUSIC  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
SB CH  
MODE  
STEREO/  
ENTER  
MIDNIGHT  
DIRECT  
MUTE  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
MENU TUNER EDIT  
TOP MENU  
GUIDE  
TUNE  
2
SYSTEM  
SETUP  
ST  
ST  
ENTER  
TUNE  
To do a more advanced setup for surround sound  
see EXPERT setup starting on page 79.  
3-4  
AUDIO  
RETURN  
SURRBACK (Surround Back) SYSTEM (See  
page 35)  
Use to choose options for your surround back  
speakers.  
3-4 2  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
STANDBY/ ON  
LS  
RS  
S
TAN  
D
B
Y
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
MULTI  
J
OG  
QUICK setup (see page 13)  
MULTI  
J
OG CONTROL  
RETURN  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
MIDNIGHT  
LOUDNESS  
BAND  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/ TREBLE  
PHONES  
Use to setup your surround sound system in the  
minimum amount of time.  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
1 Turn on the receiver and press  
the RECEIVER button on the  
rem ote control.  
NORMAL setup (see pages 3640)  
Use this method to manually adjust all the  
surround sound functions.  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
2 Press the SYSTEM SETUP  
button.  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
EXPERT setup (see page 7987)  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
Use these settings to fine tune your surround  
sound and make it more personalized.  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
This display appears on the receiver.  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
3 SURROUND SETUP should be  
selected. If it isnt use the 5∞  
buttons to select it. Press the  
ENTER button.  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
This display appears on the receiver.  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up for Surround Sound  
SURRBACK SYSTEM (Surround Back System )  
This setup selects how your surround back system will be used. If you want to use it for surround back speakers  
in your main speaker system choose NORMAL SYSTEM. In this case you wont have any B (or secondary)  
speaker system as these speakers fill that role also for the VSX-43TX. If you want to use your surround back  
speakers in a different room choose SECOND ZONE. Alternatively, you can choose the FRONT BI-AMP setting,  
in order to deliver more power to the front speakers.  
2 Use the 5∞ buttons to select  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
MULTI  
OPERATION  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
NORMAL SYSTEM, SECOND  
ZONE or FRONT BI-AMP setting.  
Press the ENTER button.  
NORMAL SYSTEM: if you want to use your  
surround back speakers as part the surround  
sound system in your main room.  
MULTI CONTROL  
DVD/LD  
VCR 2  
TV/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
TV CONT  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
INPUT  
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE MUSIC  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
SB CH  
MODE  
STEREO/  
ENTER  
MIDNIGHT  
DIRECT  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
MUTE  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
DSP  
SB CH  
MASTER  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
VOLUME  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
MENU TUNER EDIT  
TOP MENU  
GUIDE  
TUNE  
SYSTEM  
SETUP  
SECOND ZONE: Choose to use your surround  
back speakers for a B speaker system. That is, if  
you want to use your surround back speakers for a  
different room. You will hear the same source as is  
playing in the main room and multichannel  
ST  
ST  
ENTER  
TUNE  
1-3  
AUDIO  
RETURN  
CHANNEL  
DTV ON/OFF BAND  
CHANNEL+  
D.ACCESS  
MPX  
CLASS  
soundtracks will be downmixed to stereo.  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
1-3  
FRONT BI-AMP: Choose this setting if you want  
to deliver more power to your front speakers. This  
setting will use your surround back speaker  
terminals so you will only be able to get 5.1  
channel playback. Also, you will have to bi-wire  
your speakers to do this (see page 65).  
STANDBY/ ON  
S
TAN  
D
B
Y
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
MULTI  
J
OG  
MULTI OG CONTROL  
J
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
RETURN  
MIDNIGHT  
LOUDNESS  
BAND  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/ TREBLE  
PHONES  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
3 EXIT should be selected. Press  
the ENTER button.  
Follow steps 13 on page 34, if necessary, to get  
to the starting point m entioned here.  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
1 SURRBACK should be selected.  
If it isnt use the 5∞ buttons to  
select it. Press the ENTER  
button.  
You will return to the SURROUND SETUP display.  
Next, proceed to either QUICK (on page 13) or  
NORMAL (on the next page).  
If you w ant to change a setting before pro-  
ceeding  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
start over from step 1.  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up for Surround Sound  
NORMAL setup  
This is the manual method to setup your sound parameters for surround sound. It is more exact than the QUICK  
set up and should give you finer surround sound.  
You only need to do these settings once (unless you change the placement of your current speaker system or  
add new speakers, etc.).  
SPEAKER SET (See pages 3738)  
Use to specify the type and number of speakers  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
MULTI  
OPERATION  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
you connected.  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MULTI CONTROL  
DVD/LD  
VCR 2  
TV/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
TV CONT  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
INPUT  
LS  
RS  
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE MUSIC  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
SB CH  
MODE  
CHANNEL LEVEL (See page 39)  
STEREO/  
ENTER  
MIDNIGHT  
DIRECT  
Use to balance the volumes of your different speak-  
ers. This is also necessary for the most realistic  
surround sound.  
MUTE  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
MENU TUNER EDIT  
TOP MENU  
GUIDE  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
TUNE  
SYSTEM  
SETUP  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
ST  
ST  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
ENTER  
TUNE  
LS  
RS  
1-2  
AUDIO  
RETURN  
CHANNEL DELAY (See page 40)  
CHANNEL  
DTV ON/OFF BAND  
CHANNEL+  
Use to select the distance settings for each set  
of speakers. You must add distance settings to  
all your speakers for the most realistic surround  
sound. Adding a slight delay to some speakers  
enhances sound separation and is particularly  
important for achieving a surround sound effect.  
You need to figure out the distance from your  
listening position to your speakers to add the  
proper delay.  
1-2  
STANDBY/ ON  
S
TAN  
D
B
Y
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
MULTI  
J
OG  
MULTI  
J
OG CONTROL  
RETURN  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
MIDNIGHT  
LOUDNESS  
BAND  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/ TREBLE  
PHONES  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
See the next four pages for more information on  
these settings.  
Follow steps 13 on page 34, if necessary, to get to  
the starting point m entioned here.  
1 Use the 5∞ buttons to select  
NORMAL. Press the ENTER  
button.  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
2 Use the 5∞ buttons to navigate  
through the NORMAL setup  
m enus. When you have the  
setting you w ant in a particular  
m enu, press ENTER.  
In each mode the current settings are displayed.  
We suggest you adjust all these settings when  
you first hook up the receiver. That gets them out  
of the way and you won't need to return to this  
setting mode unless you change your home set up  
by adding new speakers (etc.).  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up for Surround Sound  
SPEAKER SETTING  
The information below shows you how to select the correct settings for the type and number of speakers you  
connected. Most importantly, you need to decide how to route the sound for all the speakers you connected. To  
do this select the size of the front, center, surround and surround back speakers (if you hooked them up). It is  
important to make these settings as accurately as possible or, in some cases, you may not get the full  
soundtrack from a disc.  
Use the information below to complete the steps that follow and set up the receiver to match the speakers you  
have hooked up. If starting fresh, complete steps 1-2 in page 36.  
FRONT (default setting is SMALL)  
Select SMALL to send bass frequencies to the subwoofer. Select LARGE if your speakers will reproduce bass  
frequencies effectively or if you did not connect a subwoofer. (If you select SMALL for the front speakers the  
subwoofer will automatically be switched YES. Also, the center and surround speakers cannot be set to  
LARGE if the front speakers are set to SMALL. In this case, all bass frequencies are sent to the subwoofer.)  
CENTER (default setting is SMALL)  
Select LARGE if your speaker will reproduce bass frequencies effectively.  
Select SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer.  
If you did not connect a center speaker, choose NO. In this case, the center channel is output from the  
front speakers.  
SURROUND (default setting is SMALL)  
Select LARGE if your speakers will reproduce bass frequencies effectively.  
Select SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer.  
If you did not connect surround speakers choose NO. In this case, the sound of the surround channels is  
output from the front and center speakers.  
If the front speakers are set to SMALL, the surround speakers will automatically be set to SMALL.  
SURROUND BACK (default setting is SMALL X2)  
If you chose FRONT BI-AMP or SECOND ZONE in SURRBACK SYSTEM on page 35, or if you chose  
NO for SURROUND SPEAKERS, you w ont be able to choose this setting.  
Select the number of surround back speakers you have. You can choose one speaker, two, or none.  
If you select one, make sure that speaker if hooked up to the left surround back terminal.  
Select LARGE if your speakers will reproduce bass frequencies effectively.  
Select SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer.  
If you did not connect surround back speakers choose NO.  
If the front speakers or the surround speakers are set to SMALL, the surround back speakers will automati-  
cally be set to SMALL.  
If you choose THX in step 2 then the surround back speakers can only be set to SMALL (X1 or X2), or NO.  
SUBWOOFER (default setting is YES)  
Leave it selected if you connected a subwoofer.  
If you selected SMALL for the front speakers the subwoofer will automatically be set to on (you wont be  
able to choose NO or PLUS).  
If you did not connect a subwoofer choose NO. In this case, the bass frequencies are output from the front  
or surround speakers.  
Choose the PLUS setting if you want stronger reproduction of deep bass sounds.  
If you select PLUS the bass frequencies that would normally come out the front and center speakers are all  
routed to the subwoofer.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up for Surround Sound  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
4 With the 5∞ buttons choose the  
speakers that you w ant to set.  
Press the ENTER button.  
MENU TUNER EDIT  
TOP MENU  
GUIDE  
TUNE  
SYSTEM  
SETUP  
ST  
ST  
ENTER  
TUNE  
1-7  
AUDIO  
RETURN  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
CHANNEL−  
DTV ON/OFF BAND  
CHANNEL+  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
D.ACCESS  
MPX  
CLASS  
You can select from FRONT, CENTER, SUR-  
ROUND or SURROUND BACK. The selected  
setting blinks.  
1-7  
5 Use the 5∞ buttons to choose  
the num ber (YES or NO, X1 or  
X2) and the size (LARGE or  
SMALL) for each set of speakers.  
Press the ENTER button.  
STANDBY/ ON  
S
TAN  
D
B
Y
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
MULTI  
J
OG  
MULTI  
J
OG CONTROL  
RETURN  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
MIDNIGHT  
LOUDNESS  
BAND  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/ TREBLE  
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
PLUS is also a possibility for the SUBWF.  
If you selected THX in step 2, you only need to  
set the number of surround back speakers.  
Follow steps 1-3 on page 34, if necessary, to get to  
the starting point m entioned here.  
1 Use the 5∞ buttons to select  
NORMAL. Press the ENTER  
button.  
6 Repeat steps 3 & 4 for all  
speakers channels.  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
7 Use the 5∞ buttons to select  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
EXIT and press ENTER.  
LS  
RS  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
2 SPEAKER SET should be selected.  
If it isnt use the 5∞ buttons to  
select it. Press the ENTER button.  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
Next, proceed to CHANNEL LEVEL below.  
If you w ant to change a setting before  
proceeding  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
start over from step 2.  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
3 Use the 5∞ buttons to select  
FREE or THX speaker system  
setting. Press the ENTER button.  
FREE: To set all the speakers.  
m em o  
If you have a subwoofer and like lots of bass, it may  
seem logical to select LARGE for your front speakers  
and leave the subwoofer selected. This may not,  
however, yield the best bass results. Depending on  
the size and shape of your room you may actually  
experience a decrease in the amount of bass due to  
what is called low frequency cancellations. If you  
have a subwoofer, listen to the bass response with  
the front speakers set to LARGE and SMALL  
alternately and let your ears judge which sounds best.  
If you have a subwoofer, the safest option is to route  
all the bass sounds to it by selecting SMALL for the  
front speakers.  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
THX: All speakers are set to SMALL and the  
SUBWF to YES. You can select the number of  
surround back speakers.  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
For FREE, select FREE and press ENTER. Then go  
to step 4.  
For THX, select THX and press ENTER. Then go  
to step 5 but you only need to set the number of  
surround back speakers.  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up for Surround Sound  
CHANNEL LEVEL (channel balance)  
The following steps show you how to balance the sound output level of your speakers. Proper speaker balance  
is essential for obtaining high quality surround sound. If continuing from SPEAKER SETTING go to step 2.  
MENU TUNER EDIT  
TOP MENU  
4 Adjust the speaker level w ith the  
below instructions for the  
m ethod you chose.  
TUNE  
GUIDE  
SYSTEM  
SETUP  
ST  
ST  
ENTER  
TUNE  
1-6  
AUDIO  
RETURN  
Adjust the channel level from 10 dB to +10 dB in  
0.5 dB increments.  
The default setting is 0 dB.  
In MANUAL (m anual test tone) m ode  
To switch the test tone between each speaker use  
1-6  
the 5∞ buttons and push ENTER. Adjust the level  
of each speaker using the 5∞ buttons and  
ENTER. When done go to step 5.  
STANDBY/ ON  
S
TAN  
D
B
Y
MOVIE  
MUSI  
C
ENTER  
MULTI  
J
OG  
M
ULTI  
J
OG CONTROL  
RETURN  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI  
-
BI  
T
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
HI-  
SAMPLING  
M
IDNIGHT  
LOUDNESS  
BAND  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/ TREBL  
P
HONES  
In AUTO (autom atic test tone) m ode  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
E
This mode switches the test tone between each  
speaker automatically. The test tone output cycles  
through the speakers in the following order:  
FRONT  
L
FRONT  
R
SURROUND  
R
CENTER  
Follow steps 1-3 on page 34, if necessary, to get  
to the starting point m entioned here.  
SUB  
WOOFER  
SURROUND  
L
SURRBACK  
L
SURRBACK  
R
1 Use the 5∞ buttons to select  
Adjust the level of each speaker using the 5∞  
buttons as the test tone is emitted and wait for it  
to move to the next speaker. When done go to  
step 6.  
If you w ant to change a setting before pro-  
ceeding  
NORMAL. Press the ENTER button.  
2 CHANNEL LEVEL should be  
selected. If it isnt use the 5∞  
buttons to select and press ENTER.  
you need to complete the procedure and start  
over from step 1.  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
5 When you have the levels you  
w ant press ENTER. EXIT should  
be selected (if it isnt select it  
w ith the 5∞ buttons).  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
3 There are tw o w ays to set the  
CHANNEL LEVEL: MANUAL or  
AUTO. Select a setting m ode  
w ith the 5∞ buttons and press  
ENTER.  
6 Press ENTER.  
Next, proceed to CHANNEL DELAY next page.  
If you w ant to change a setting before pro-  
ceeding  
Test tones will be output.  
WARNING : Be prepared! The test tones are  
output at a high volum e level.  
start over from step 2.  
MASTER VOLUME rotates to the reference  
position (0 dB) and the display on the receiver  
flashes TEST TONE. After a few seconds the  
test tone is output.  
m em o  
MANUAL: move the test tone manually and  
adjust the channel level.  
If your subwoofer has a volume control, set it to the  
middle position before doing these operations.  
If you are using a Sound Pressure Level (SPL) meter  
take the readings from your main listening position and  
adjust the level of each speaker to 75dB SPL (C-weight-  
ing/slow reading).  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
AUTO: the test tone moves by itself and you  
The volume of the subwoofer test tone tends to sound  
lower than it actually is. You may need to adjust the  
le ve l afte r te s ting your s ys te m w ith an actual  
soundtrack.  
adjust the levels.  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up for Surround Sound  
CHANNEL DELAY  
Adding a slight delay to some speakers is necessary to achieve proper sound depth, separation as well as an  
effective surround sound effect. You need to figure out the distance from your listening position to your  
speakers to add the proper delay. The following steps show you how to set the delay time for each channel by  
specifying the distances from your listening position to each speaker. If continuing from CHANNEL LEVEL go to  
step 2.  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
4 Use the 5∞ buttons to add or  
MENU TUNER EDIT  
TOP MENU  
GUIDE  
subtract the distance in feet that  
the speaker is from your norm al  
listening position. Press the  
ENTER button.  
TUNE  
7
SYSTEM  
SETUP  
ST  
ST  
ENTER  
TUNE  
1-6  
AUDIO  
RETURN  
CHANNEL  
DTV ON/OFF BAND  
CHANNEL+  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
1-6 7  
Adjust the speaker distance in half foot  
increments from 0.5 to 45 feet.  
The default setting is 10 feet.  
STANDBY/ ON  
S
TAN  
D
B
Y
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
MULTI  
J
OG  
5 Repeat steps 3 & 4 for all  
speaker channels.  
MULTI  
J
OG CONTROL  
RETURN  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
MIDNIGHT  
LO  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/ TREBLE  
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
6 Use the 5∞ buttons to select  
EXIT and press ENTER.  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
Follow steps 1-3 on page 34, if necessary, to get to  
the starting point m entioned here.  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
1 Use the 5∞ buttons to select  
NORMAL. Press the ENTER  
button.  
If you w ant to change a setting before  
proceeding  
start over from step 2.  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
DSP  
SB CH  
7 Press the SYSTEM SETUP  
button to leave the SYSTEM  
SETUP m ode.  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
2 The CHANNEL DELAY should be  
selected. If it isnt use the 5∞  
buttons to select it. Press the  
ENTER button.  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
3 Select each speaker channel w ith  
the 5∞ buttons and press  
ENTER.  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
You can select from L, C, R, RS, SBR, SBL, LS and  
SW. The selected setting blinks.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
Stereo and Multichannel Playback  
The following instructions show you how to play Dolby Digital or DTS sound sources with the VSX-43TX.  
Before doing so be sure to complete the setup procedures described in QUICK setup in the Easy Setup Guide  
Pt. 2 (starting on page 13) or Setting Up for Surround Sound (starting on page 34). This is particularly important  
to achieve a surround sound effect with Dolby Digital or DTS sources.  
1 Turn on the pow er of the playback  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
MULTI  
OPERATION  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
com ponent.  
2
3
MULTI CONTROL  
DVD/LD  
VCR 2  
TV/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
TV CONT  
2 Press the RECEIVER  
button ( STANDBY/ ON  
on the front panel) to turn  
on the receiver.  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
INPUT  
STANDBY  
indicator  
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE MUSIC  
3
6
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
SB CH  
MODE  
4
STEREO/  
ENTER  
MIDNIGHT  
DIRECT  
MUTE  
STANDBY/ ON  
Be sure that the STANDBY indicator  
turns off on the front panel.  
S
TAN  
D
B
Y
MASTER  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
VOLUME  
MENU TUNER EDIT  
TOP MENU  
GUIDE  
TUNE  
SYSTEM  
SETUP  
3 Press the MULTI CONTROL (or  
ST  
ST  
ENTER  
TUNE  
INPUT) on the rem ote control to  
select the source you w ant to  
playback.  
Choose the type of signal input with the SIGNAL  
SELECT button.  
AUDIO  
RETURN  
CHANNEL−  
DTV ON/OFF BAND  
CHANNEL+  
D.ACCESS  
MPX  
CLASS  
DIMMER  
SIGNAL SEL  
VIDEO SEL  
LOUDNESS  
DNR  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
ENTER  
See the next page for more details, if necessary.  
BASS/TREBLE  
DISC  
+
HI-BIT  
+10  
4 Choose a LISTENING MODE one of  
tw o w ays.  
TV CONTROL  
CHANNEL  
SUB TITLE  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
VOLUME  
For SURROUND modes: press MOVIE or MUSIC, use  
the | \ buttons to select the mode you want and  
press ENTER.  
For STEREO/DIRECT: for press the button for that  
mode.  
RECEIVER  
On the front panel, use the MOVIE or MUSIC buttons  
and the MULTI JOG dial. Press the button of the mode  
type you want and then use the dial to cycle through  
the possibilities. Press ENTER.  
See “SURROUND Modes,” on pages 44–45 for  
details on which modes are available and in which  
situations they are designed to be used.  
2 4  
4
AUDIO/ VIDEO  
M
ULTI-CHAN  
N
EL  
R
ECEIVER VS X-4  
3
TX  
STANDBY/ ON  
S
TAN  
D
B
Y
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
STEREO/ DIRECT MULTI CH  
IN  
ACOUSTIC EQ  
5 Start playback of the com ponent  
you selected in step 3.  
MULTI  
J
OG  
MASTER VOLUME  
REFEREN CE AUDIO/ VIDEO  
M
ULTI-CHAN  
N
EL RECEIVER  
6 Adjust the volum e by using the  
MASTER VOLUME –/ + buttons on  
the rem ote control. On the front  
panel use the MASTER VOLUME  
dial.  
6
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
Sw itching ANALOG/ DIGITAL Signal Input  
This button selects the type of input signal, ANALOG or DIGITAL, sent to the receiver. You need to take special  
care to switch to the appropriate input when necessary. For example, the switch would have to be on DIGITAL  
to hear Dolby Digital or DTS surround sound material but it would have to be on analog to record from the  
ANALOG out jacks on the receiver. The default setting is AUTO (which chooses digital over analog when both  
are available but goes with whatever is available) for: DVD/LD, TV/SAT, VIDEO, CD, CDR/TAPE1. The default  
setting is ANALOG for: VCR1/DVR, VCR2, MD/TAPE2, TUNER and LINE.  
1 Press RECEIVER.  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
MULTI  
OPERATION  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
2 Press the SIGNAL SEL (SIGNAL  
SELECT on the front panel) button to  
select the input signal corresponding  
to the form at of the source  
MULTI CONTROL  
DVD/LD  
VCR 2  
TV/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
TV CONT  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
INPUT  
1
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE MUSIC  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
SB CH  
MODE  
STEREO/  
com ponent.  
Each press switches the signal in the order below:  
ENTER  
MIDNIGHT  
DIRECT  
MUTE  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
MENU TUNER EDIT  
TOP MENU  
GUIDE  
AUTO  
ANALOG  
DIGITAL  
TUNE  
SYSTEM  
SETUP  
ST  
ST  
ENTER  
TUNE  
AUDIO  
RETURN  
m em o  
CHANNEL−  
DTV ON/OFF BAND  
CHANNEL+  
D.ACCESS  
MPX  
CLASS  
When DIGITAL signal is selected, 2 DIGITAL lights  
when a Dolby Digital signal is input; DTS lights when a  
DTS signal is input.  
DIMMER  
SIGNAL SEL  
VIDEO SEL  
LOUDNESS  
DNR  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
ENTER  
If no digital inputs are assigned (see page 76) you can  
only choose ANALOG in the SIGNAL SELECT.  
Because the audio signal from a karaoke microphone  
and LDs are recorded with analog audio only, they are  
not output from the digital outputs. Set SIGNAL  
SELECT to ANALOG to listen to these formats.  
When an LD with DTS is played back with the SIGNAL  
SELECT set in ANALOG, digital noise caused by playing  
back the DTS signal directly (with no decoding) is  
output. To prevent noise, you need to make digital  
connections (See pages 21 & 22) and set SIGNAL  
SELECT to AUTO or DIGITAL.  
BASS/TREBLE  
DISC  
+
HI-BIT  
+10  
2
TV CONTROL  
CHANNEL  
SUB TITLE  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
VOLUME  
RECEIVER  
Some DVD players dont output DTS signals. For more  
details, refer to the instruction manual supplied with  
your DVD player.  
This receiver can only play back Dolby Digital, PCM (32  
kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz and 96 kHz sampling  
frequency), and DTS digital signal formats. If your  
source is not one of these select ANALOG for playback.  
MULTI  
J
OG CONTROL  
RETURN  
STATION TUNING  
TUNER  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
MIDNIGHT  
LOUDNESS  
BAND  
CLASS  
SELECT  
EDIT  
MULTI  
AUDIO  
J
OG/ ENTER  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/ TREBLE  
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
VIDEO INPUT  
L
R
2
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
Listening Modes  
The three listening mode types on the receiver are explained here (to select listening modes see page 41).  
The kind of playback you can get in the three modes depends on what kind of a source (DVD, etc.) you are  
using. The basic distinction is between 2 channel sources and multichannel sources. The MOVIE and MUSIC  
modes that are available to you will also differ according to your source and which SB CH MODE you choose.  
This is explained below as well.  
For home theater the MOVIE and MUSIC listening modes are designed to deliver realistic and powerful  
multichannel surround sound that recreates the movie theater or concert experience. The first four MOVIE  
modes (THX CINEMA, 2PRO LOGIC II MOVIE, 2PRO LOGIC, NEO:6 CINEMA) and first two MUSIC modes  
(2PRO LOGIC II MUSIC, NEO:6 MUSIC) incorporate pure decoding of the signal. That is they present it just as  
it was recorded in the sound studio. With these modes the receiver will automatically employ the format of the  
sound source (for example, Dolby Digital or DTS) and display it on screen. The other modes are DSP modes.  
They add some type of effect to the signal.  
You may need to experiment with these modes to see which suit your home system and personal tastes.  
The MUSIC and STEREO modes are designed to be used with music sources but some MUSIC modes are also  
suitable for film soundtracks. Again, try different modes with various soundtracks to see which you like but you  
must choose one of the MOVIE and MUSIC listening modes in order to get surround sound.  
Depending on your setup, in STEREO mode only the front two speakers, and sometimes the subwoofer (if you  
have one), are used.  
STEREO m odes  
When a source is played in this mode, it plays through just the front left and right speakers (and possibly your  
subwoofer depending on your speaker settings). Dolby Digital and DTS multichannel sources are downmixed  
to stereo.  
STEREO  
In STEREO mode the audio plays according to the surround setup settings and you can still use ACOUSTIC  
CALIBRATION EQ, DIGITAL NR, MIDNIGHT, LOUDNESS, HI-BIT HI-SAMPLING mode and TONE CONTROL  
functions.  
DIRECT  
In DIRECT mode, the audio bypasses all types of signal processing to remain as close to the source audio  
quality as possible.  
If you switch on ACOUSTIC CALIBRATION EQ, DIGITAL NR, MIDNIGHT, LOUDNESS, HI-BIT HI-  
SAMPLING mode and TONE CONTROL functions when DIRECT is selected, the receiver automati-  
cally switches to STEREO.  
m em o  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
MOVIE m odes (SURROUND m ode)  
The MOVIE mode is a newly designed system for enhancing movie soundtracks and other audio-visual sources  
that optimizes its effects in accordance with your source, SB CH MODE and speaker configuration. The first four  
modes (THX CINEMA, 2PRO LOGIC II MOVIE, 2PRO LOGIC, NEO:6 CINEMA) are for pure decoding of  
multichannel sound sources (for example, Dolby Digital or DTS). With these modes the receiver will  
automatically employ the format of the sound source (for example, Dolby Digital or DTS) and display it on  
screen. With two channel sources these first four modes will create surround channels. Next, there are six  
PIONEER original sound modes that use DSP (Digital Signal Processing) to create different types of sound  
environments as described below.  
THX CINEMA  
THX is a set of technical standards created by Lucasfilm Ltd. These standards were designed to emulate a  
film sound stage and thus reproduce, with the greatest possible accuracy, the soundtrack intended by the  
filmmakers.  
2PL II MOVIE (2PRO LOGIC II MOVIE)*  
This mode gives 5.1 channel surround sound. It is suitable for movies, especially those recorded in Dolby  
Surround. The channel separation and movement of surround effects is comparable to Dolby Digital 5.1.  
With sources other than stereo (5.1, etc.) the display will automatically show the type of decoding being  
employed (Dolby Digital, DTS-ES, etc.).  
2PRO LOGIC*  
This mode gives 4.1 channel surround sound. It is less sensitive to the quality of the source material, so  
may be useful when 2 PRO LOGIC II MOVIE or 2 PRO LOGIC II MUSIC modes do not give good  
results. With sources other than stereo (5.1, etc.) the display will automatically show the type of decoding  
being employed (Dolby Digital, DTS-ES, etc.).  
NEO:6 CINEMA*  
This mode gives 6.1 channel surround sound and is suitable for movies. The NEO:6 Cinema mode delivers  
good channel separation for movie soundtracks. With sources other than stereo (5.1, etc.) the display will  
automatically show the type of decoding being employed (Dolby Digital, DTS-ES, etc.).  
ACTION  
This mode is designed for action movies, which generally use lots of sound effects. The mode enriches the  
sound to make it more realistic and extends the parameters to pick up high and low sound effects.  
SCI-FI  
This mode is designed for science fiction movies. It creates a broad sound space, separating dialog from  
sound effects to heighten the overall impact of the soundtrack.  
DRAMA  
This mode is designed for movies with a lot of dialog. The elements of dialog are enhanced, making the  
characters seem more real. The mode also compresses the dynamic range somewhat so loud sounds do  
not overpower softer ones (compare this with the MIDNIGHT listening mode explained on page 48).  
MUSICAL  
This mode is primarily for music and adds a spacious feeling to the sound. A long delay time of reflected  
sounds provides resonant tones which emulate a concert hall.  
MONOFILM  
This mode is designed for older movies which are recorded with mono soundtracks. The special sound  
processing of this mode will allow you to experience these movies in surround sound even though they  
were not recorded that way originally.  
5/ 7-D THEATER  
This mode is especially designed to give sound depth to stereo sources. The overall effect builds a  
dynamic and broad sound space, allowing two-channel (stereo) signals to faithfully imitate a five speaker  
sound. The mode should be used in conjunction with Dolby Pro Logic for sources bearing the  
DOLBY S URROUND  
mark. The display will show either 5-D THEATER or 7-D THEATER according to the source,  
SB CH MODE and speaker configuration.  
When you input a m ultichannel signal the decoding is done autom atically so you cannot choose these  
m odes.  
*
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
MUSIC m odes (SURROUND m ode)  
The MUSIC modes allow you to transform your living room into a variety of different sonic environments when  
playing either two-channel or multichannel sources. It optimizes its effects in accordance with your source, SB  
CH MODE and speaker configuration. The first two modes are for pure decoding of multichannel sound sources.  
With these modes the receiver will automatically employ the format of the sound source (for example, Dolby  
Digital or DTS). With two channel sources these first four modes will create surround channels. Then there are  
five PIONEER original sound modes that use DSP (Digital Signal Processing) to create different types of sound  
environments as described below. Lastly, the 5/7-CH STEREO mode simply outputs a stereo signal through all  
of your speakers.  
2PL II MUSIC (2PRO LOGIC II MUSIC)*  
This mode gives 5.1 channel surround sound and is suitable for music. Compared to the Movie Mode PRO  
LOGIC, the surround effect is more enveloping. With sources other than stereo (5.1, etc.) the display will  
automatically show the type of decoding being employed (Dolby Digital, DTS-ES, etc.).  
NEO:6 MUSIC*  
This mode gives 6.1 channel surround sound and is suitable for music. The NEO:6 Music mode plays the  
stereo source as is through the front left/right speakers, and generates a natural, ambient surround and  
center sound. With sources other than stereo (5.1, etc.) the display will automatically show the type of  
decoding being employed (Dolby Digital, DTS-ES, etc.).  
CLASSICAL  
Simulates the acoustic effects of a large concert hall. Suitable for classical music. A long delay time of  
reflected sounds, coupled with reverb effects, let the listener experience the dynamic and rich sounds  
characteristic of concert halls and powerful orchestral performances.  
CHAMBER  
Simulates the acoustic environment of a very resonant concert hall. Rich reverberation and a full sound  
create the impression of a lively performance space.  
J AZZ  
Simulates the acoustic effects of a jazz club. Reflected sound is virtually below 100 msec so that the  
listener can experience a live band effect.  
ROCK  
Simulates the acoustic effects of a mid-sized concert hall. The listener can experience a live band effect  
with good separation of the instruments, a strong bass and the vivid feeling of a live performance.  
DANCE  
Simulates the acoustic effects of a dance club. Features a strong bass sound.  
Reflected sound delay time is virtually below 50 msec, for the listener to experience the visceral power of  
dance music.  
5/ 7-CH STEREO  
Simulates the acoustic environment of a regular stereo while using all the speakers in the system to induce  
a rich, all-around sound. The display will change to 5-CH STEREO or 7-CH STEREO according to the SB CH  
MODE and speaker configuration.  
When you input a m ultichannel signal the decoding is done autom atically so you cannot choose  
these m odes.  
*
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
Adjusting the Effect of a Listening Mode  
The DSP (Digital Signal Processing) listening modes have sound processing added to accentuate a certain kind  
of atmosphere or effect (see the preceding pages for explanation). You can choose if you want to strengthen or  
weaken this effect in the given mode. The DSP MOVIE modes are: ACTION, SCI-FI, DRAMA, MUSICAL,  
MONOFILM, 5/7-D THEATER. The DSP MUSIC modes are: CLASSICAL, CHAMBER, JAZZ, ROCK, DANCE.  
The following instructions show you how to adjust the amount of effect.  
1 Press RECEIVER.  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
MULTI  
OPERATION  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
2 Press the EFFECT/ CH SEL button  
repeatedly until you see EFFECT in the  
receivers display.  
MULTI CONTROL  
DVD/LD  
VCR 2  
TV/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
TV CONT  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
INPUT  
1
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE MUSIC  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
SB CH  
MODE  
3 Use the +/ buttons to add or subtract  
STEREO/  
ENTER  
MIDNIGHT  
DIRECT  
MUTE  
the am ount of effect.  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
MENU TUNER EDIT  
TOP MENU  
GUIDE  
TUNE  
SYSTEM  
SETUP  
The amount of effect can be adjusted ranging from 10  
to 90 (the default setting value is 50) by pressing +/.  
m em o  
ST  
ST  
ENTER  
TUNE  
5/7CH STEREO modes cannot be adjusted.  
AUDIO  
RETURN  
CHANNEL−  
DTV ON/OFF BAND  
CHANNEL+  
D.ACCESS  
MPX  
CLASS  
Adding/ Adjusting the Effect in Dolby Pro  
Logic II Music Mode  
DIMMER  
SIGNAL SEL  
VIDEO SEL  
LOUDNESS  
DNR  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
ENTER  
2
3
BASS/TREBLE  
DISC  
The Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode has three settings you can  
choose from which adjust the spatial feeling of the surround sound.  
These settings are best matched to each individual source instead  
of one setting being left on for all sources. The three settings and  
how to apply them are explained here.  
+
HI-BIT  
+10  
TV CONTROL  
CHANNEL  
SUB TITLE  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
VOLUME  
1 Press RECEIVER.  
RECEIVER  
2 Press the EFFECT/ CH SEL button  
repeatedly and select the setting you  
w ant. They appear in the receivers  
display.  
CENTER WIDTH : With Pro Logic decoding center channel  
signals can come only from the center speaker. If no center  
speaker is present this channel is split between the two front  
speakers, creating a "phantom" channel. The CENTER WIDTH  
feature lets you adjust the center channel so it can heard only  
from the center speaker, only as a "phantom" channel or in  
varying degrees of both.  
DIMENSION: This allows you to adjust the soundfield  
towards the front or towards the rear of your room.  
PANORAMA: This gives the music a wraparound surround  
feel.  
3 Use the +/ buttons to add or subtract  
the am ount of effect or turn on/ off.  
CENTER WIDTH : Strengthen or weaken the effect between  
07. The default is 3.  
DIMENSION: Move soundfield backward or forward with -3  
being the furthest back and +3 being the furthest forward.  
The default is 0.  
46  
PANORAMA: Turn on or off. The default is off.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
Listening w ith ACOUSTIC CALIBRATION EQ  
You can listen to the soundtrack with the ACOUSTIC CALIBRATION EQ if you have adjusted ACOUSTIC CAL  
EQ in the EXPERT Setup menu (see page 79). To do so follow the instructions below. For information about  
ACOUSTIC CALIBRATION EQ mode, see page 84.  
1 Press the ACOUSTIC EQ button on  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
MULTI  
OPERATION  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
the rem ote control or ACOUSTIC EQ  
button on the front panel.  
Each press switches ACOUSTIC CALIBRATION EQ  
mode on or off.  
MULTI CONTROL  
DVD/LD  
VCR 2  
TV/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
TV CONT  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
INPUT  
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE MUSIC  
When ACOUSTIC EQ is being applied the MCACC  
indicator lights.  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
SB CH  
MODE  
1
STEREO/  
ENTER  
MIDNIGHT  
DIRECT  
MUTE  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
You cant turn on ACOUSTIC CALIBRATION EQ  
mode on in MULTI CH IN mode.  
m em o  
• If you turn ACOUSTIC CALIBRATION EQ mode  
on in DIRECT mode, the receiver automatically  
switches to STEREO mode.  
1
MCACC indicator  
AUDIO/ VIDEO  
M
ULTI-CHAN  
N
EL RECEIVER VS X-4  
3
TX  
STEREO/ DIRECT MULTI CH IN  
ACOUSTIC EQ  
MASTER VOLUME  
Reducing Noise During Playback (DIGITAL NR Function)  
To reduce extraneous noise switch on DIGITAL NR. This feature is effective with sources containing a lot of  
background noise like cassette and video tape  
1 Press RECEIVER.  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
MULTI  
OPERATION  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
2 Press the DNR button on the rem ote  
control.  
MULTI CONTROL  
DVD/LD  
VCR 2  
TV/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
TV CONT  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
INPUT  
1
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
Each press switches DIGITAL NR on or off.  
When on, DNR lights in the display.  
MOVIE MUSIC  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
SB CH  
MODE  
STEREO/  
ENTER  
MIDNIGHT  
DIRECT  
MUTE  
m em o  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
MENU TUNER EDIT  
TOP MENU  
GUIDE  
• In cases described below, noise may not be reduced even  
if DIGITAL NR is on.  
· Sudden noise  
TUNE  
SYSTEM  
SETUP  
ST  
ST  
ENTER  
TUNE  
· Extremely loud noise  
AUDIO  
RETURN  
· Signals that contain too many high frequencies  
Signals which are very clean to begin with.  
• DIGITAL NR is effective at levels shown below for each  
source.  
CHANNEL−  
DTV ON/OFF BAND  
CHANNEL+  
D.ACCESS  
MPX  
CLASS  
STEREO  
DIMMER  
SIGNAL SEL  
VIDEO SEL  
LOUDNESS  
DNR  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
ENTER  
· Analog input ..................................................... 10-18 dB  
· Digital input ...................................................... 10-15 dB  
· AM/FM tuner ................................................... 10-15 dB  
MOVIE/MUSIC ...................................................... 6-10 dB  
• Depending on the condition of the source, there may not  
be a noticeable improvement in the quality of the sound.  
You cant use the DIGITAL NR mode with the THX  
CINEMA or MULTI CH IN modes, or a 96 kHz signal.  
• If you set the DIGITAL NR on in DIRECT mode the  
receiver will switch to STEREO mode.  
BASS/TREBLE  
DISC  
+
HI-BIT  
+10  
2
TV CONTROL  
CHANNEL  
SUB TITLE  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
VOLUME  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
Listening in MIDNIGHT Mode  
This useful feature makes it possible to get excellent surround sound effects even when listening at low  
volumes. It can be used with any surround sound source and play soundtracks so that the quieter sounds are  
audible even while playing a soundtrack at low volumes. This feature is applicable only when the master volume  
is under 20 dB.  
1 Press the MIDNIGHT button on the  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
MULTI  
OPERATION  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
rem ote control.  
Each press switches MIDNIGHT mode on or off.  
When on, MIDNIGHT lights in the display.  
MULTI CONTROL  
DVD/LD  
VCR 2  
TV/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
TV CONT  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
INPUT  
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE MUSIC  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
SB CH  
MODE  
The surround effect adjusts itself automatically  
in accordance with the volume level.  
m em o  
STEREO/  
ENTER  
MIDNIGHT  
DIRECT  
You cant use the MIDNIGHT mode with the THX  
CINEMA, MULTI CH IN, LOUDNESS modes.  
If you set MIDNIGHT on when in DIRECT mode  
the receiver switches to STEREO mode.  
MUTE  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
1
MENU TUNER EDIT  
TOP MENU  
GUIDE  
TUNE  
SYSTEM  
SETUP  
ST  
ST  
ENTER  
MULTI  
J
OG CONTROL  
RETURN  
STATION TUNING  
TUNER  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
MIDNIGHT  
LOUDNESS  
BAND  
CLASS  
SELECT  
EDIT  
MULTI  
AUDIO  
J
OG/ ENTER  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/ TREBLE  
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
R
VIDEO INPUT  
1
Listening in LOUDNESS Mode  
The LOUDNESS mode boosts the bass and treble in a signal. It is useful for listening to music at low volumes.  
This feature is applicable only when the master volume is under 20 dB.  
1 Press RECEIVER.  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
MULTI  
OPERATION  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
MULTI CONTROL  
2 Press the LOUDNESS button on the  
rem ote control.  
DVD/LD  
VCR 2  
TV/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
TV CONT  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
INPUT  
1
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE MUSIC  
Each press switches LOUDNESS mode on or off.  
When on, LOUDNESS lights in the display.  
D.ACCESS  
MPX  
CLASS  
You cant use the LOUDNESS mode with the THX  
m em o  
DIMMER  
SIGNAL SEL  
VIDEO SEL  
LOUDNESS  
DNR  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
ENTER  
CINEMA, MULTI CH IN, MIDNIGHT modes.  
If you set LOUDNESS on in DIRECT mode the  
receiver will switch to STEREO mode.  
BASS/TREBLE  
DISC  
2
+
HI-BIT  
+10  
TV CONTROL  
CHANNEL  
SUB TITLE  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
VOLUME  
MULTI  
J
OG CONTROL  
RETURN  
STATION TUNING  
TUNER  
EDIT  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
MIDNIGHT  
LOUDNESS  
BAND  
CLASS  
SELECT  
MULTI  
AUDIO  
J
OG/ ENTER  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/ TREBLE  
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
R
VIDEO INPUT  
RECEIVER  
2
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
Adjusting Bass and Treble (TONE CONTROL)  
You can adjust the low (bass) and high (treble) frequencies. The TONE button can also be used to bypass the  
tone circuitry.  
1 Press RECEIVER.  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
MULTI  
OPERATION  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
2 Press the TONE button on the  
rem ote control or the front panel to  
put the receiver in tone adjust m ode.  
MULTI CONTROL  
DVD/LD  
VCR 2  
TV/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
TV CONT  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
INPUT  
1
4
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE MUSIC  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
SB CH  
MODE  
There are two tone modes TONE: ON and TONE:  
BYPASS. The first means the tone functions are active  
and also lets you adjust these functions. The second  
means the tone controls are being bypassed, and thus  
have no effect on the sound.  
STEREO/  
ENTER  
MIDNIGHT  
DIRECT  
MUTE  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
MENU TUNER EDIT  
TOP MENU  
GUIDE  
TUNE  
SYSTEM  
SETUP  
3 Press the BASS/ TREBLE button  
repeatedly to select BASS or  
TREBLE.  
ST  
ST  
ENTER  
TUNE  
AUDIO  
RETURN  
CHANNEL−  
DTV ON/OFF BAND  
CHANNEL+  
If TONE: BYPASS appears, press the TONE button to  
get TONE: ON.  
D.ACCESS  
MPX  
CLASS  
DIMMER  
SIGNAL SEL  
VIDEO SEL  
LOUDNESS  
DNR  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
ENTER  
4 Use the +/ – buttons to adjust the low  
or high frequency levels.  
2
3
BASS/TREBLE  
DISC  
+
HI-BIT  
+10  
A few seconds after you finish adjusting the tone the  
receiver will revert to the sound mode it was in at the  
beginning of the process.  
TV CONTROL  
CHANNEL  
SUB TITLE  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
VOLUME  
m em o  
RECEIVER  
The TONE CONTROL can be adjusted in a range of ±6  
dB.  
The TONE CONTROL cannot be set on in THX  
CINEMA, MULTI CH IN modes.  
If you set TONE CONTROL on in DIRECT mode the  
receiver will switch to STEREO mode.  
MULTI  
J
OG CONTROL  
RETURN  
STATION TUNING  
TUNER  
EDIT  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
MIDNIGHT  
LOUDNESS  
BAND  
CLASS  
SELECT  
MULTI  
AUDIO  
J
OG/ ENTER  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/ TREBLE  
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
VIDEO INPUT  
L
R
2 3 4  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
Listening in HIBIT/ SAMPLING Mode  
Use to hear CD and DVD, as well as other digital soundtracks, at a wider dynamic range, allowing for finer audio  
reproduction.  
1 Press RECEIVER.  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
MULTI  
OPERATION  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
2 Press the HIBIT button on the  
rem ote control or HI-BIT HI-  
SAMPLING button on the front  
panel.  
MULTI CONTROL  
DVD/LD  
VCR 2  
TV/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
TV CONT  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
INPUT  
1
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE MUSIC  
ENTER  
DISC  
SIGNAL SEL  
VIDEO SEL  
DNR  
BASS/TREBLE  
Each press switches HI-BIT/SAMPLING mode on or off.  
HI-BIT/SAMPLING lights in the display.  
+
HI-BIT  
+10  
TV CONTROL  
CHANNEL  
SUB TITLE  
2
REMOTE  
SETUP  
VOLUME  
m em o  
HIBIT mode cannot be set on MULTI CH IN mode.  
If the receiver is in DIRECT mode and you press the  
HIBIT button the receiver will switch to STEREO  
mode.  
RECEIVER  
This feature cant be used with 96 kHz and 88.2 kHz  
sources.  
MULTI  
J
OG CONTROL  
RETURN  
STATION TUNING  
TUNER  
EDIT  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
MIDNIGHT  
LOUDNESS  
BAND  
CLASS  
SELECT  
MULTI  
AUDIO  
J
OG/ ENTER  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/ TREBLE  
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
R
VIDEO INPUT  
2
DVD-Audio/ MULTI CHANNEL IN Playback  
MULTI CH IN allows you to connect a DVD-Audio player or an external decoder to enjoy certain multichannel  
discs. To use MULTI CH IN playback follow the instructions below.  
1 Press the MULTI CH INPUT button on  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
MULTI  
OPERATION  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
the rem ote control or the MULTI CH  
IN button on the front panel.  
Each press switches the input between the previous  
mode and MULTI CH IN.  
MULTI CONTROL  
DVD/LD  
VCR 2  
TV/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
TV CONT  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
INPUT  
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE MUSIC  
ON: This is a true playback of the signal from the  
MULTI CH INPUT terminals, output without digital  
processing. You can only control each channel level.  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
SB CH  
MODE  
1
STEREO/  
ENTER  
MIDNIGHT  
DIRECT  
MUTE  
OFF: Cancels the MULTI CH IN modes.  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
You cant use any kind of sound processing to-  
m em o  
gether with MULTI CH IN. Selecting a listening  
mode, or switching these modes, cancels the  
MULTI CH IN.  
1
AUDIO/ VIDEO  
M
ULTI-CHAN  
N
EL RECEIVER VS X-4  
3
TX  
If any other speakers are set to NO the signal for  
that (those) channel(s) wont get output at all.  
You cannot set sound features (pages 4749) on,  
in MULTI CH IN mode.  
STEREO/ DIRECT MULTI CH IN  
ACOUSTIC EQ  
If youre listening to DVD-Audio but can only get  
stereo sound set your DVD players 5.1 channel  
analog playback to on.  
MASTER VOLUME  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
SB CH MODE button  
SB CH MODE  
The SB CH MODE makes available surround back channels through your surround back speakers. You must  
have chosen NORMAL SYSTEM in the SURRBACK SYSTEM setting (see page 35) and have SURROUND and  
SURROUND BACK speakers set to something other than NO (see pages 3738) to use this feature.  
1 Press the SB CH MODE button on the  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
rem ote control.  
Each press switches between ON, OFF and AUTO.  
MULTI  
OPERATION  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
MULTI CONTROL  
DVD/LD  
VCR 2  
TV/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
TV CONT  
ON  
AUTO  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
INPUT  
OFF  
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE MUSIC  
For each choice you can create SURROUND BACK  
channels under the conditions listed below.  
ON: surround back channels are available with all  
SURROUND modes.  
AUTO: same as above except whether SURROUND BACK  
channels are available with any of the PRO LOGIC II (or  
PRO LOGIC) modes depends on whether the source has  
an EX or ES flag or not.  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
SB CH  
MODE  
STEREO/  
ENTER  
MIDNIGHT  
DIRECT  
MUTE  
1
MASTER  
VOLUME  
MULTI  
J
OG CONTROL  
RETURN  
STATION TUNING  
TUNER  
EDIT  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
MIDNIGHT  
LOUDNESS  
BAND  
CLASS  
SELECT  
MULTI  
AUDIO  
J
OG/ ENTER  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/ TREBLE  
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
With the NEO:6 modes surround back channels will  
always be available.  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
VIDEO INPUT  
L
R
OFF: SURROUND BACK channels will not be heard.  
You cant use the SB CH MODE with MULTI CH IN  
or STEREO/DIRECT modes.  
m em o  
1
VIRTUAL SURROUND BACK Mode  
The VIRTUAL SURROUND BACK mode emulates surround back channels through your surround speakers. You  
must have chosen NORMAL SYSTEM in the SURRBACK SYSTEM setting (see page 35); have SURROUND  
speakers set to something other than NO, and have chosen NO for the SURROUND BACK speakers in  
SPEAKER SETTING (see page 37-38) to use this mode.  
1 Press the SB CH MODE button on the  
rem ote control.  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
MULTI  
OPERATION  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
Each press switches between VIRTL SB ON, VIRTL SB  
OFF and VIRTL SB AUTO.  
MULTI CONTROL  
DVD/LD  
VCR 2  
TV/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
TV CONT  
VIRTL SB ON  
VIRTL SB AUTO  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
INPUT  
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE MUSIC  
VIRTL SB OFF  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
SB CH  
MODE  
For each choice you can create  
VIRTUAL SURROUND BACK channels under the  
conditions listed below.  
STEREO/  
ENTER  
MIDNIGHT  
DIRECT  
MUTE  
1
MASTER  
VOLUME  
VIRTL SB ON: virtual surround back sound is available  
with all SURROUND modes except THX CINEMA; for a  
stereo signal you must choose the NEO:6 MOVIE/MUSIC  
SURROUND mode or a Pioneer original sound mode (see  
pages 4445).  
VIRTL SB AUTO: same as above except whether virtual  
surround back sound is available with any of the PRO  
LOGIC II (or PRO LOGIC) modes depends on whether the  
source has an EX or ES flag or not.  
MULTI  
J
OG CONTROL  
RETURN  
STATION TUNING  
TUNER  
EDIT  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
HI-SAMPLING  
MIDNIGHT  
LOUDNESS  
BAND  
CLASS  
SELECT  
MULTI  
J
OG/ ENTER  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/ TREBLE  
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
VIDEO INPUT  
L
AUDIO  
R
With the NEO:6 modes virtual surround back sound will  
always be available.  
VIRTL SB OFF: virtual surround back sound will not be  
heard.  
1
You cant use the VIRTUAL SURROUND BACK  
mode with the THX CINEMA, MULTI CH IN,  
STEREO/DIRECT modes.  
m em o  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
DUAL MONO setting and playback  
The dual mono setting can only be used when listening to Dolby Digital or homemade discs that have dual mono  
software encoded in them. Dual mono software usually is used to put two different mono soundtracks, that you  
can listen to together or separately, on one DVD. With this setting you can choose which dual mono setting you  
want to listen to. Remember this setting is only applicable if you are using Dolby Digital software with dual  
mono and want to isolate one of the channels therein.  
MULTI  
J
OG CONTROL  
RETURN  
STATION TUNING  
TUNER  
EDIT  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
1 Press the RETURN button for m ore  
than three seconds to put the  
SET UP  
MIDNIGHT  
LOUDNESS  
BAND  
CLASS  
SELECT  
MULTI  
AUDIO  
J
OG/ ENTER  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/ TREBLE  
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
VIDEO INPUT  
L
R
receiver in DUAL MONO m ode.  
Hold down the RETURN button to cycle through the  
different DUAL MONO settings. When you find the  
one you want release the button. The L (ch1) and R  
(ch2) indicators in the display light to indicate the  
playback channel.  
1
DUAL : ch1  
DUAL : ch2  
DUAL: ch1/ch2  
The different settings are: DUAL ch1, where you only  
hear channel 1; DUAL ch2, where you only hear channel  
2; and DUAL ch1/ch2, where you hear both channels,  
but independently from different speakers.  
The default setting is DUAL ch1.  
You can only use this function with Dolby Digital  
m em o  
sources that have this function  
Using Headphones  
MULTI  
J
OG CONTROL  
RETURN  
STATION TUNING  
TUNER  
EDIT  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
1 Plug headphones into the PHONES  
jack on the front of the receiver.  
SET UP  
MIDNIGHT  
LOUDNESS  
BAND  
CLASS  
SELECT  
MULTI  
J
OG/ ENTER  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/ TREBLE  
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
VIDEO INPUT  
L
AUDIO  
R
No sound will be audible from the speakers when  
headphones are plugged in.  
1 PHONES jack  
All SURROUND modes will be downmixed to 2  
channels.  
m em o  
If youre listening to a 2 channel source there will  
be no matrix decoding (i.e. you will not be able to  
get surround sound decoding).  
For MULTI CH IN mode, only the signal input from  
the MULTI CH IN FRONT L and R channels can  
be heard.  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operation  
Video Select  
This function allows you to listen to one sound source while you watch a different video source on your TV. The  
sound source is set in the normal fashion as explained on page 41. You then change the video input with the  
VIDEO SEL button.  
1 Press RECEIVER.  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
MULTI  
OPERATION  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
2 Press the VIDEO SEL button on the  
rem ote control to cycle through the  
different possible video inputs.  
MULTI CONTROL  
DVD/LD  
VCR 2  
TV/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
TV CONT  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
INPUT  
1
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE MUSIC  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
SB CH  
MODE  
The first press shows the video input you are currently  
using. After that pressing VIDEO SELECT cycles though  
the possibilities in the following order:  
STEREO/  
ENTER  
MIDNIGHT  
DIRECT  
MUTE  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
DVD/LD  
OFF  
TV/SAT  
VCR2  
VIDEO  
MENU TUNER EDIT  
TOP MENU  
GUIDE  
TUNE  
SYSTEM  
SETUP  
VCR1/DVR  
ST  
ST  
ENTER  
TUNE  
AUDIO  
RETURN  
The OFF setting means you are listening without a  
video signal. (Also, when you select CD, CD-R/TAPE1,  
MD/TAPE2, TUNER or LINE functions the VIDEO  
SELECT will be set to off.)  
CHANNEL−  
DTV ON/OFF BAND  
CHANNEL+  
D.ACCESS  
MPX  
CLASS  
DIMMER  
SIGNAL SEL  
VIDEO SEL  
LOUDNESS  
DNR  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
ENTER  
After choosing a video input the display on the receiver  
will show that input for about 5 seconds and then  
revert to showing the listening mode the receiver is in.  
BASS/TREBLE  
DISC  
+
HI-BIT  
+10  
2
TV CONTROL  
CHANNEL  
SUB TITLE  
The VIDEO SELECT remains set to the input you  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
VOLUME  
m em o  
chose until you change the audio input.  
If you change functions the receiver will reset it-  
self to make the video and audio inputs corre-  
spond.  
RECEIVER  
Also, if you switch the power of the receiver off  
when you turn it back on the video and audio in-  
puts will reset so that they correspond.  
Adjusting the Brightness of the Display (DIMMER)  
Use the display DIMMER button to adjust the brightness of the fluorescent display.  
1 Press RECEIVER.  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
MULTI  
OPERATION  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
MULTI CONTROL  
2 Use the display DIMMER button on  
the rem ote control to alternate  
betw een the different levels of  
brightness for the display.  
DVD/LD  
VCR 2  
TV/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
TV CONT  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
INPUT  
1
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE MUSIC  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
SB CH  
MODE  
STEREO/  
Four levels of brightness ranging from very dim to very  
bright can be selected. Each press changes the  
brightness of the display. When cycling through the  
options, the default brightness can also be selected.  
ENTER  
D.ACCESS  
MIDNIGHT  
MPX  
DIRECT  
MUTE  
CLASS  
DIMMER  
SIGNAL SEL  
VIDEO SEL  
LOUDNESS  
DNR  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
ENTER  
2
BASS/TREBLE  
DISC  
Please note: It is a feature of this unit that the  
m em o  
+
HI-BIT  
+10  
fluorescent display will be brighter for a few sec-  
onds after you choose a function (like DVD/LD,  
CD, etc.) and then get softer. This will still hap-  
pen when you adjust the brightness but the new  
setting will be the one the display softens to.  
TV CONTROL  
CHANNEL  
SUB TITLE  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
VOLUME  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Tuner  
Autom atic and Manual Tuning  
The following steps show you how to tune in FM and AM radio broadcasts using the automatic (search) and  
manual (step) tuning functions. If you already know the exact frequency of the station you want, see “Direct  
Access Tuning“ on the following page.  
1 Press the TUNER button.  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
MULTI  
OPERATION  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
On the remote, this selects the tuner function on the  
receiver and sets the remote to the tuner operation  
mode.  
MULTI CONTROL  
DVD/LD  
VCR 2  
TV/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
TV CONT  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
1
3
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
INPUT  
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE MUSIC  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
SB CH  
MODE  
LS  
RS  
STEREO/  
ENTER  
MIDNIGHT  
DIRECT  
MUTE  
2 Press the BAND button to select the  
band (FM or AM).  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
MENU TUNER EDIT  
TOP MENU  
GUIDE  
TUNE  
Each press switches the band: FM j AM  
SYSTEM  
SETUP  
ST  
ST  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
ENTER  
TUNE  
DSP  
AUDIO  
RETURN  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
CHANNEL−  
DTV ON/OFF BAND  
CHANNEL+  
2
D.ACCESS  
MPX  
CLASS  
3 Tune in the station.  
DIMMER  
SIGNAL SEL  
VIDEO SEL  
LOUDNESS  
DNR  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
ENTER  
For Autom atic Tuning  
Press and hold TUNE –/+ for about one second, then  
release.  
MPX  
button  
BASS/TREBLE  
DISC  
+
HI-BIT  
+10  
The tuner starts searching the selected band and stop  
automatically at the first station it locates. Repeat to  
locate other stations.  
TV CONTROL  
CHANNEL  
SUB TITLE  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
VOLUME  
For Manual Tuning  
To change frequencies one step at a time, press  
TUNE –/+ repeatedly.  
RECEIVER  
To change frequencies quickly, hold down TUNE –/+  
and release when you reach the frequency you  
desire.  
1
AUDIO/ VIDEO  
M
ULTI-CHAN  
N
EL  
R
ECEIVER VS X-4  
3
TX  
STANDBY/ ON  
MPX Mode  
S
TAN  
D
B
Y
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
STEREO/ DIRECT MULTI CH  
IN  
ACOUSTIC EQ  
MULTI  
J
OG  
MASTER VOLUME  
If the TUNED or STEREO indicators do not light when  
tuning an FM station, because the station is too far away or  
the broadcast signal is weak, press MPX on the remote  
control to switch to MONO reception. This should improve  
reception enough for you to enjoy the broadcast.  
M
ULTI  
J
OG CONTROL  
RETURN  
STATION TUNING  
TUNER  
EDI  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI  
-
BI  
T
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
HI-  
SAMPLING  
M
IDNIGHT  
LOUDNESS  
BAND  
CLASS  
SELECT  
T
M
ULTI J OG/ ENTER  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/ TREBL  
P
HONES  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
E
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDI  
O
R
I
NPUT  
2 3  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Tuner  
Direct Access Tuning  
The following steps show you how to tune directly to a specific frequency using the remote control.  
1 Press the TUNER button.  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
MULTI  
OPERATION  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
This selects the tuner function on the receiver and sets  
the remote to the tuner operation mode.  
MULTI CONTROL  
DVD/LD  
VCR 2  
TV/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
TV CONT  
1
2
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
INPUT  
2 Press the BAND button to select the  
band (FM or AM).  
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE MUSIC  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
SB CH  
MODE  
Each press switches the band : FM j AM  
STEREO/  
ENTER  
MIDNIGHT  
DIRECT  
MUTE  
MASTER  
3 Press the D.ACCESS button to  
activate the direct access tuning  
m ode.  
VOLUME  
MENU TUNER EDIT  
TOP MENU  
GUIDE  
TUNE  
SYSTEM  
SETUP  
ST  
ST  
ENTER  
TUNE  
The cursor blinks in the display on the front panel.  
AUDIO  
RETURN  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
DSP  
SB CH  
CHANNEL−  
DTV ON/OFF BAND  
CHANNEL+  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
D.ACCESS  
MPX  
CLASS  
3
4
DIMMER  
SIGNAL SEL  
VIDEO SEL  
LOUDNESS  
DNR  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
ENTER  
4 Use the num ber buttons to enter the  
frequency of the station you w ant.  
BASS/TREBLE  
DISC  
+
HI-BIT  
+10  
Exam ple:  
To tune station 106.00 (FM), press: 1 = ` = 6 =  
` = `  
TV CONTROL  
CHANNEL  
SUB TITLE  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
VOLUME  
To cancel before inputting the frequency  
Press D.ACCESS, and enter the frequency again.  
RECEIVER  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Tuner  
Mem orizing Frequently Used Stations  
The following steps show you how to memorize up to 30 radio stations in 3 classes (each holding 10 stations).  
When memorizing FM frequencies, the receiver also memorizes the MPX mode (STEREO or MONO).  
1 Tune in the station you w ant.  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
MULTI  
OPERATION  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
See "Automatic and Manual Tuning" or "Direct Access  
Tuning" on page 54 and 55.  
MULTI CONTROL  
DVD/LD  
VCR 2  
TV/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
TV CONT  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
INPUT  
2 Press the TUNER EDIT button to  
activate the m em ory function.  
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE MUSIC  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
SB CH  
MODE  
STEREO/  
SIGNAL  
ENTER  
MIDNIGHT  
dB  
DIRECT  
MUTE  
ANALOG STEREO  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
SP A B  
MENU TUNER EDIT  
TOP MENU  
GUIDE  
TUNE  
4
2
SYSTEM  
SETUP  
ST  
ST  
«
ENTER  
TUNE  
SIGNAL  
dB  
AUDIO  
RETURN  
ANALOG STEREO  
5
3
CHANNEL−  
DTV ON/OFF BAND  
CHANNEL+  
SP A B  
D.ACCESS  
MPX  
CLASS  
DIMMER  
SIGNAL SEL  
VIDEO SEL  
LOUDNESS  
DNR  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
ENTER  
3 Press the CLASS button repeatedly  
to select a class num ber.  
BASS/TREBLE  
DISC  
+
HI-BIT  
+10  
Each press switches the display:  
TV CONTROL  
CHANNEL  
SUB TITLE  
CLASS A  
CLASS B  
CLASS C  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
VOLUME  
4 Press the ST / + buttons (or the  
num ber buttons) repeatedly to  
select a channel (0~9) w ithin the  
respective class.  
RECEIVER  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
4 5  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
AUDIO/ VIDEO  
M
ULTI-CHAN  
N
EL  
R
ECEIVER VS X-4  
3
TX  
LS  
RS  
STANDBY/ ON  
S
TAN  
D
B
Y
5 Press the ENTER button to input  
your choice.  
MOVIE  
MUSI  
C
ENTER  
STEREO/ DIRECT MULTI CH  
I
N
ACOUSTI EQ  
C
MULTI  
J
OG  
MASTER VOLUME  
M
ULTI  
J
OG CONTROL  
RETURN  
STATION TUNING  
SELECT  
TUNER  
EDI  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI  
-
BI  
T
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
HI-  
SAMPLING  
M
IDNIGHT  
LOUDNESS  
BAND  
CLASS  
T
M
ULTI J OG/ ENTER  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/ TREBL  
P
HONES  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
E
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
I
NPUT  
2
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Tuner  
Nam ing Mem orized Stations  
You can input a name of up to four characters for each preset station in the receivers memory (see the previous  
page). This name can be anything you choose. For example, you could input JAZZ for that station and when you  
listen to it the name, rather than the frequency number, will appear on your display.  
1 Press the TUNER button on the  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
MULTI  
OPERATION  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
rem ote control.  
MULTI CONTROL  
DVD/LD  
VCR 2  
TV/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
TV CONT  
2 Press CLASS repeatedly to select the  
class.  
1
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
INPUT  
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE MUSIC  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
SB CH  
MODE  
Repeatedly pressing this button cycles through the  
three available classes, A, B and C.  
STEREO/  
ENTER  
MIDNIGHT  
DIRECT  
MUTE  
MASTER  
3 Press ST / + to select the preset  
VOLUME  
MENU TUNER EDIT  
TOP MENU  
GUIDE  
channel.  
TUNE  
3,5  
4
SYSTEM  
SETUP  
ST  
ST  
ENTER  
TUNE  
4 Press TUNER EDIT to select the  
station nam e m ode.  
AUDIO  
RETURN  
5,6  
2
CHANNEL−  
DTV ON/OFF BAND  
CHANNEL+  
SIGNAL  
dB  
D.ACCESS  
MPX  
CLASS  
ANALOG STEREO  
DIMMER  
SIGNAL SEL  
VIDEO SEL  
LOUDNESS  
DNR  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
ENTER  
SP A B  
BASS/TREBLE  
DISC  
+
HI-BIT  
+10  
«
SIGNAL  
dB  
TV CONTROL  
CHANNEL  
SUB TITLE  
ANALOG STEREO  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
VOLUME  
SP A B  
RECEIVER  
5 Enter the station nam e you w ant.  
Names can be up to four characters long.  
Use the MULTI JOG dial (front panel) or the ST +/–  
buttons (remote) to select characters.  
Press ENTER to confirm a character. If no character  
is input, a space is input.  
1,5 5,6  
AUDIO/ VIDEO  
M
ULTI-CHAN  
N
EL  
R
ECEIVER VS X-4  
3
TX  
The possible selections are shown below.  
STANDBY/ ON  
S
TAN  
D
B
Y
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ  
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz  
0123456789  
MOVIE  
MUSI  
C
ENTER  
STEREO/ DIRECT MULTI CH  
I
N
ACOUSTI EQ  
C
MULTI  
J
OG  
MASTER VOLUME  
M
ULTI  
J
OG CONTROL  
RETURN  
STATION TUNING  
TUNER  
EDI  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI  
-
BI  
T
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
HI-  
SAMPLING  
M
IDNIGHT  
LOUDNESS  
BAND  
CLASS  
SELECT  
T
M
ULTI J OG/ ENTER  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/ TREBL  
P
HONES  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
E
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDI  
O
R
I
NPUT  
!#$% &()*+,./:;<=>?@[ \ ]ˆ_{|} [space]  
To erase a station name, simply repeat steps 1-4 and  
input four spaces instead of a name.  
2 3 4  
6 Press ENTER w hen you have got the  
characters you w ant to enter.  
Repeat steps 2 to 5 to memorize up to 30 preset  
broadcast station names.  
m em o  
To change a station name, enter a new name over the  
top of the existing one.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Tuner  
Recalling Mem orized Stations  
1 Press the TUNER button.  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
MULTI  
OPERATION  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
This selects the TUNER function on the receiver and  
sets the remote to the TUNER operation mode.  
MULTI CONTROL  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DVD/LD  
VCR 2  
TV/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
TV CONT  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
1
2
DSP  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
INPUT  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE MUSIC  
L
C
S
LFE  
SP A B  
R
LS  
RS  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
SB CH  
MODE  
STEREO/  
ENTER  
MIDNIGHT  
DIRECT  
2 Press the CLASS button repeatedly  
to select a class num ber.  
MUTE  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
MENU TUNER EDIT  
TOP MENU  
GUIDE  
Each press switches the display:  
TUNE  
SYSTEM  
SETUP  
CLASS A  
CLASS B  
CLASS C  
ST  
ST  
ENTER  
TUNE  
AUDIO  
RETURN  
CHANNEL−  
DTV ON/OFF BAND  
CHANNEL+  
3 Use the NUMBER buttons to select  
the channel you desire.  
D.ACCESS  
MPX  
CLASS  
To select channel 7, press 7.  
To select channel 0, press `.  
For exam ple : If 99.50 MHz (FM) was memorized in  
class B at channel 7.  
DIMMER  
SIGNAL SEL  
VIDEO SEL  
LOUDNESS  
DNR  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
ENTER  
BASS/TREBLE  
DISC  
+
3
HI-BIT  
+10  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
TV CONTROL  
CHANNEL  
SUB TITLE  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
VOLUME  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
To step through each channel in order  
Press the ST /+ buttons repeatedly.  
RECEIVER  
STANDBY/ ON  
S
TAN DB  
Y
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
MULTI  
J
OG  
MULTI  
J
OG CONTROL  
RETURN  
STATION TUNING  
TUNER  
EDIT  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
MIDNIGHT  
LOUDNESS  
BAND  
CLASS  
SELECT  
MULTI  
AUDIO  
J
OG/ ENTER  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/ TREBLE  
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
R
VIDEO INPUT  
2 3  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rem ote Control of Other Com ponents  
Setting Up the Rem ote Control to Control Other  
Com ponents  
In addition to controlling the receiver, the supplied remote control can operate your other components (VCR, TV,  
DVD, CD, etc.) after you program it to do so. In this way, instead of fumbling with many different controls and  
buttons, you only need to use one remote control. If your component(s) are listed in the remote control's  
memory, simply follow the steps below. If your component(s) are not listed, or if you want the remote to learn  
additional operations, you can use the learning mode to input the information from the remote controls supplied  
with your other components.  
Recalling Settings Stored in the Rem ote Control  
The following steps show you how to recall the setting stored in the remote control. Once a setting is recalled  
and the component assigned, you can use this remote to easily operate the component.  
To exit from the rem ote control setup m ode at any tim e, press REMOTE SETUP.  
• See "Using Remote Control with Other Components" on pages 61–62 to operate your other  
components.  
m em o  
• The TUNER button cannot be assigned.  
1 While holding dow n the REMOTE  
LED  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
MULTI  
OPERATION  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
SETUP button press  
to select the  
MULTI CONTROL  
preset recall setup m ode.  
The LED begins to blink.  
To cancel the preset recall setup mode press REMOTE  
DVD/LD  
VCR 2  
TV/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
TV CONT  
2
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
INPUT  
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE MUSIC  
SETUP.  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
SB CH  
MODE  
STEREO/  
ENTER  
MIDNIGHT  
DIRECT  
2 Press the MULTI CONTROL button  
for the com ponent you w ant to  
control.  
MUTE  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
MENU TUNER EDIT  
TOP MENU  
GUIDE  
TUNE  
SYSTEM  
SETUP  
The LED lights continously.  
ST  
ST  
ENTER  
TUNE  
AUDIO  
RETURN  
3 Point the rem ote tow ard the  
com ponent to be controlled, enter  
the 4 digit setup code (see pages 93-  
94 for codes).  
CHANNEL−  
DTV ON/OFF BAND  
CHANNEL+  
D.ACCESS  
MPX  
CLASS  
1
1
DIMMER  
SIGNAL SEL  
VIDEO SEL  
LOUDNESS  
DNR  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
ENTER  
The LED blinks.  
BASS/TREBLE  
DISC  
After a code has been input the power of the compo-  
nent being input will turn on or off.  
The remote will return to the previous mode after  
thirty seconds of inactivity.  
The power of the component being input will only turn  
on or off if that component is able to be turned on  
directly by remote control.  
3
+
HI-BIT  
+10  
TV CONTROL  
CHANNEL  
SUB TITLE  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
VOLUME  
Repeat steps 2 through 3 to assign preset codes  
RECEIVER  
for as m any com ponents as necessary.  
If you can't get your com ponent to respond to  
any of the codes you can still program the  
com ponent into the rem ote control using the  
procedure in the next section.  
4 Press the REMOTE SETUP button to  
exit the preset recall setup m ode.  
The remote control and receiver return to their  
previous operation modes.  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rem ote Control of Other Com ponents  
Program m ing Signals from Other Rem ote Controls (LEARNING Mode)  
If preset codes are not available for your component(s), or the available preset codes do not operate correctly,  
you can use this procedure to program in signals from the remote control(s) of your other component(s). These  
steps can also be used to add further operations to the remote control that were successfully set with the  
stored settings (see page 59).  
To exit from the rem ote control setup m ode at any tim e, press REMOTE SETUP.  
You can also program the 5˜∞˜2˜3 and ENTER buttons with the LEARNING mode.  
The TUNER button cannot be assigned.  
m em o  
Some commands cannot be learned.  
1 While holding dow n the REMOTE  
LED  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
MULTI  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
OPERATION  
SETUP button press  
learning setup m ode.  
The LED begins to blink.  
to select the  
MULTI CONTROL  
DVD/LD  
VCR 2  
TV/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
TV CONT  
2
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
INPUT  
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
To cancel the learning setup mode press REMOTE SET  
UP.  
MOVIE MUSIC  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
SB CH  
MODE  
STEREO/  
ENTER  
MIDNIGHT  
DIRECT  
2 Press the MULTI CONTROL button  
for the com ponent you w ant to  
control.  
MUTE  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
Buttons  
MENU TUNER EDIT  
TOP MENU  
GUIDE  
that are  
TUNE  
SYSTEM  
SETUP  
The LED lights continously.  
able to  
learn new  
commands  
ST  
ST  
ENTER  
TUNE  
3
1
AUDIO  
RETURN  
3 Press the button to be program m ed.  
CHANNEL−  
DTV ON/OFF BAND  
CHANNEL+  
For example DVD/LD  
The LED blinks rapidly.  
D.ACCESS  
MPX  
CLASS  
The TV , TV INPUT SELECT, TV CHANNEL +/–  
and TV VOLUME +/buttons are only available for  
learning when programming TV CONTROL  
operations.  
DIMMER  
SIGNAL SEL  
VIDEO SEL  
LOUDNESS  
DNR  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
ENTER  
BASS/TREBLE  
DISC  
+
HI-BIT  
+
10  
TV CONTROL  
CHANNEL  
SUB TITLE  
4 Point the rem ote controls at each  
other and press the button on the  
other rem ote control for the  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
VOLUME  
1
operation you w ish to program .  
RECEIVER  
2-8 inches  
1 Point the remote controls toward each other.  
2 Press the button on the other remote control  
corresponding to the operation you wish to  
program.  
The LED will turn off and then light again.  
To program additional operations for the current  
com ponent, repeat steps 3 and 4.  
To program operations for another com ponent,  
repeat steps 2 through 4.  
5 Press the REMOTE SETUP button to  
exit the learning setup m ode.  
The remote control and receiver return to their  
previous operation modes.  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rem ote Control of Other Com ponents  
Using Rem ote Control w ith Other Com ponents  
CD/ MD/ CD-R/ VCR/ DVD/ LD/ DVD recorder/ Cassette Deck operations  
The follow ing operations are available from the receiver's rem ote control after you program it  
m em o  
(see “Setting Up the Rem ote Control to Control Other Com ponents,“ page 59).  
To perform these operations, press the MULTI CONTROL button for the component you want to  
control.  
• For more information on individual commands consult the manual that came with the component.  
Button(s)  
Function  
Components  
CD/MD/CD-R/VCR/DVD/LD/  
DVD recorder/Cassette deck  
SOURCE  
Press to switch the components between STANDBYand ON.  
Press to return to the start of the current track or chapter. Repeated presses  
skips to the start of previous tracks or chapter.  
CD/MD/CD-R/DVD/LD/  
4
¢
Go back channels (channel ).  
VCR/DVD recorder  
Cassette deck  
Play the reverse side of the tape on a reversible deck.  
Press to advance to the start of the next track or chapter. Repeated presses  
skips to the start of following tracks or chapter.  
CD/MD/CD-R/DVD/LD/  
Go forward channels (channel +).  
Pause playback or recording.  
VCR/DVD recorder  
CD/MD/CD-R/VCR/DVD/LD/  
DVD recorder/Cassette deck  
8
CD/MD/CD-R/VCR/DVD/LD/  
DVD recorder/Cassette deck  
¡
1
3
Hold down for fast forward playback.  
Hold down for fast reverse playback.  
Start playback.  
CD/MD/CD-R/VCR/DVD/LD/  
DVD recorder/Cassette deck  
CD/MD/CD-R/VCR/DVD/LD/  
DVD recorder/Cassette deck  
Stop playback (on some models, pressing this when the disc is already  
stopped will cause the disc tray to open).  
CD/MD/CD-R/VCR/DVD/LD/  
DVD recorder/Cassette deck  
7
SUBTITLE  
Button  
Displays/changes the subtitles on multilingual DVDs.  
DVD/DVD recorder  
Directly access tracks on a program source.  
Directly access chapter on a program source.  
Directly select a channel.  
CD/MD/CD-R/LD  
DVD/DVD recorder  
VCR/DVD recorder  
Number  
Buttons  
Select tracks or chapter higher than 10. Press this button and the remaining  
number to get the track or chapter (+10 Button + 3= track or chapter 13).  
Some components may operate differently.  
CD/MD/CD-R/DVD/LD/  
DVD recorder  
+10 Button  
ENTER/DISC  
Button  
Press to start Search mode.  
DVD  
Takes you to the disc navigator.  
DVD recorder  
Changes between sides A & B of the disc.  
Press to enter the selected channel.  
Selects a disc in a multi-disc CD player.  
LD  
VCR  
CD  
MENU  
AUDIO  
Displays menus concerning the current DVD, DVR or VCR you are using.  
Changes the audio track of discs with more than one audio track.  
DVD/DVD recorder/VCR  
DVD/LD/DVD recorder  
Changes between the tuner in the TV and the tuner in the VCR.  
Play the reverse side of the tape on a reversible deck.  
VCR  
Double cassette 2nd deck  
TOP MENU  
/GUIDE  
Displays the top menu of the current DVD, LD or DVR you are using.  
DVD/LD/DVD recorder  
button  
Takes you to the guide menu of that system.  
Press to select a track  
VCR  
CD  
RETURN  
button  
Takes you to the previous menu.  
DVD/LD/VCR/DVD recorder  
|\» «&  
ENTER  
Navigate menus/options.  
Basic playback options.  
DVD/LD/DVD recorder/VCR  
Double cassette 2nd deck  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rem ote Control of Other Com ponents  
Cable TV/ Satellite TV/ Digital TV/ TV operations  
The follow ing operations are available from the receiver's rem ote control after you program it  
(see Setting Up the Rem ote Control to Control Other Com ponents,page 59).  
m em o  
To perform these operations, press the MULTI CONTROL button for the component you want to  
control.  
For more information on individual commands consult the manual that came with the component.  
Button(s)  
Function  
Components  
TV  
Press to switch the TV, Satellite TV or Cable TV between STANDBYand ON. Cable TV/ Satellite TV/ TV  
INPUT  
SELECT  
Press to switch the TV input.  
TV  
TV  
CHANNEL  
(+/)  
TV VOLUME  
Select channels.  
Cable TV/ Satellite TV/ TV  
TV  
Adjust the TV volume.  
(+/)  
Cable TV/ Satellite TV/ TV/  
Digital TV  
MENU  
Takes you to the TV menu of that system.  
Takes you to the guide menu of that system.  
Exits the menu you are viewing.  
Cable TV/ Satellite TV/ TV/  
Digital TV  
GUIDE  
RETURN  
Cable TV/ Satellite TV/ Digital  
TV  
A/BLUE  
Satellite TV/ Digital TV  
Satellite TV/ Digital TV  
Satellite TV/ Digital TV  
Cable TV  
B/Press to switch the DTV ON.  
C/GREEN  
8
1
Use to move back a page in the menu.  
D/RED  
Satellite TV/ Digital TV  
Satellite TV/ Digital TV  
Cable TV  
3
E/YELLOW  
¡
Use to move forward a page in the menu.  
Use to move back channels.  
Digital TV/ TV/ Cable TV  
4
¢
7
Use to move back a page in the menu.  
Use to move forward channels.  
Satellite TV  
Digital TV/ TV/ Cable TV  
Satellite TV  
Use to move forward a page in the menu.  
Use to show the DTV manu.  
Digital TV/ TV  
Number  
Buttons  
Cable TV/ Satellite TV/ TV/  
Digital TV  
Use to select a specific TV channel.  
ENTER/DISC  
button  
Use this button to immediately enter a new channel.  
Press to select or adjust and navigate items on the menu screen.  
Cable TV/ TV/ Digital TV  
|\» «&  
ENTER  
Cable TV/ Satellite TV/ TV/  
Digital TV  
The first four buttons are dedicated to control the TV assigned to the TV CONT button. Thus if you  
only have one TV hooked up to this system, assign it to the TV CONT button. If you have two TVs,  
assign the main TV to the TV CONT button. If you hook up your system this way, the first four TV  
controls will always be accessible.  
m em o  
For example, if you connect your TV to TV monitor, then use TV CONT for your TV. If you connect your  
TV to input source then use TV.  
Depending on the maker and individual model, there are some buttons that may not be able operate  
some equipment or may operate it in a different way.  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rem ote Control of Other Com ponents  
Setting up the DIRECT FUNCTION  
The direct function will not be necessary for most users. It is designed in case you have an external video  
source connected to your TV (a video source that is not going through the VSX-43TX). For this explanation we'll  
call this the external video deck. You'd like to control external video deck with this unit's remote control so  
you've assigned it a function button (for example purposes, the VCR 2 button). Yet, if you put the receiver in  
VCR 2 mode you'll get no picture on your TV because the external video deck signal is not going through the  
VSX-43TX. To get around this problem you set the DIRECT FUNCTION for VCR 2 to OFF. Now when you press  
VCR 2 function button you can control the external video deck with the remote but the receiver does not go into  
VCR 2 mode.  
To exit from the rem ote control setup m ode at any tim e, press REMOTE SETUP.  
The default setting for all DIRECT FUNCTIONs is ON.  
m em o  
1 While holding dow n the REMOTE  
LED  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
MULTI  
OPERATION  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
SETUP button press  
to select the  
MULTI CONTROL  
direct function setup m ode.  
The LED begins to blink.  
To cancel the direct function setup mode press  
REMOTE SET UP.  
DVD/LD  
VCR 2  
TV/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
TV CONT  
2
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
INPUT  
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE MUSIC  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
SB CH  
MODE  
STEREO/  
ENTER  
MIDNIGHT  
DIRECT  
MUTE  
2 Press the MULTI CONTROL button of  
the com ponent w hose direct  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
MENU TUNER EDIT  
TOP MENU  
GUIDE  
function you w ant to turn on or off.  
The LED lights and remains lit.  
TUNE  
SYSTEM  
SETUP  
ST  
ST  
ENTER  
TUNE  
For example, if you want to turn off direct function for  
VCR 2, you would press VCR 2.  
AUDIO  
RETURN  
CHANNEL−  
DTV ON/OFF BAND  
CHANNEL+  
3 Set the DIRECT FUNCTION of each  
external source to OFF by pressing  
D.ACCESS  
MPX  
CLASS  
3
3
1
DIMMER  
SIGNAL SEL  
VIDEO SEL  
LOUDNESS  
DNR  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
ENTER  
, ON by pressing  
The LED blinks.  
.
BASS/TREBLE  
DISC  
+
HI-BIT  
+10  
ON: The direct function is on.  
OFF: The direct function is off.  
For example, if you want to turn off direct function for  
TV CONTROL  
CHANNEL  
SUB TITLE  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
VOLUME  
VCR 2, you would press  
.
1
4 Repeat steps 2-3 to set the direct  
function for as m any com ponents as  
you w ant.  
RECEIVER  
5 Press the REMOTE SETUP button to  
exit the direct function setup m ode.  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Other Functions  
Recording from Audio/ Video Com ponents  
The following explanations show you how make a recording from one component to another connected to this receiver.  
Note that an analog recorder (such as a VCR) cannot record from a source that is connected using only a digital  
connection. Likewise, a digital recorder (such as a CD-R) cannot record digitally from a component that is connected using  
only analog connections. In both of these cases, make sure that the digital component also has analog connections to the  
receiver, and that the SIGNAL SELECT is set to ANALOG.  
When recording from one digital component to another, bear in mind that the digital signal output from this receiver  
mirrors the input from the source. So if the input is, say, Dolby Digital, the output will also be Dolby Digital. Before  
recording, make sure that the recorder is compatible with the source digital audio format.  
See page 19 for more on analog audio connections and page 21–22 for digital audio connections.  
• The receiver's volume, channel level, balance, TONE, DIGITAL NR, MIDNIGHT, LOUDNESS,  
ACOUSTIC CAL EQ and surround effects have no effect on the recorded signal.  
m em o  
• In some cases, digital recordings have copy guard protections and making a digital copy is not pos-  
sible. In this case you can only copy them in an analog manner.  
• Some video recordings are copy-protected; these sources cannot be recorded.  
• When recording video, the source must be connected to the receiver using the same type of video  
cord (composite, or S video) as you used to connect the recorder to the receiver.  
Functions that can be recorded  
1 Select the source com ponent. Set  
SIGNAL SELECT according to the  
source com ponent's signal (ANALOG  
or DIGITAL).  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
MULTI  
OPERATION  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
MULTI CONTROL  
2 Start recording (tape deck, CD  
recorder, VCR, etc.)  
DVD/LD  
VCR 2  
TV/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
TV CONT  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
INPUT  
1
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE MUSIC  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
SB CH  
MODE  
3 Playback the source to be recorded.  
STEREO/  
ENTER  
MIDNIGHT  
DIRECT  
MUTE  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
MENU TUNER EDIT  
TOP MENU  
GUIDE  
TUNE  
SYSTEM  
SETUP  
ST  
ST  
ENTER  
TUNE  
AUDIO  
RETURN  
CHANNEL−  
DTV ON/OFF BAND  
CHANNEL+  
D.ACCESS  
MPX  
CLASS  
DIMMER  
SIGNAL SEL  
VIDEO SEL  
LOUDNESS  
DNR  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
ENTER  
BASS/TREBLE  
DISC  
+
1
HI-BIT  
+10  
TV CONTROL  
CHANNEL  
SUB TITLE  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
VOLUME  
RECEIVER  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Other Functions  
SECOND ZONE (Speaker System B)/FRONT BI-AMP Setup  
Stereo playback in another room (SECOND ZONE)  
This setup enables you to listen to a pair of stereo speakers independently of the main speaker system  
hooked up to the receiver. The VSX-43TX has two possibilities for playback in another room. You can  
choose SECOND ZONE, and use the speakers hooked up to the surround back terminals as a B speaker  
system, that is, playing the same source as the main speaker system but from independent stereo  
speakers.  
1 Connect a pair of speakers to the surround back speaker term inals.  
2 Select SECOND ZONE in the SURRBACK SYSTEMS setup (see page 35)  
setup.  
m em o  
Please use speakers with a nominal impedance rated 8 -16 .  
Bi-am ping the front speakers (FRONT BI-AMP)  
For bi-amp playback you can connect both the A and B speaker terminals to your front speakers. To do this  
your speakers must be bi-wireable (that is they must have separate terminals for the high and low  
frequencies).  
Bi-amping delivers more power to the front speakers, but disables the surround back speakers, so you will  
be limited to 5.1 channel playback.  
Caution!  
FRONT Speaker  
rear side  
Most speakers with both  
Hi and Low terminals  
have two metal plates  
that connect the Hi to  
the Low terminals.  
SPEAKERS  
SURROUND BACK /  
ı
FRONT  
CENTER  
SURROUND  
Å
R
L
R
L
R
L
·
ª
ª
ª
Hi  
These must be removed  
when you are bi-amping  
the speakers or you  
could severely damage  
the amplifier. See your  
speaker manual for more  
information.  
·
·
·
ª
Lo  
Caution!  
1 Connect your speakers as show n.  
Do not allow any speaker wire from any  
terminal to touch a wire from a different  
terminal.  
Since both Front A and B speaker terminals output  
the same audio, it doesnt matter which set (A or  
B) is powering which part (HI or LOW) of the  
speaker.  
2 Select FRONT BI-AMP in the  
SURRBACK SYSTEMS setup (see  
page 35).  
The surround back channel amplifier is now used  
to power the B set of speaker terminals and the  
A+B (SP3AB) speaker setting is automatically  
selected. The speaker setting in this case can only  
be A+B or OFF.  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Other Functions  
A/ B Speaker Button  
If you selected NORMAL SYSTEM in the SURRBACK SYSTEM setup (see page 35) your surround back  
speakers will be used was part of your of main speaker systems and this button will simply switch if off or on.  
If you selected SECOND ZONE in the SURRBACK SYSTEM setup (see page 35) this button will cycle through  
the A (main) speaker system, the B speaker system (the surround back speakers acting as a separate second  
zone), both speaker systems, and off.  
MULTI  
J
OG CONTROL  
RETURN  
STATION TUNING  
TUNER  
EDIT  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
1 Press the SPEAKERS button (on the  
front panel) to sw itch speakers on/  
off or cycle through the different  
speaker system s if SECOND ZONE  
or FRONT BI-AMP has been selected  
in the SURRBACK SYSTEM setup.  
SET UP  
MIDNIGHT  
LOUDNESS  
BAND  
CLASS  
SELECT  
MULTI  
AUDIO  
J
OG/ ENTER  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/ TREBLE  
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
VIDEO INPUT  
L
R
1
A(SP3A):  
Sound is output from speaker system A and the same signal is output from the pre out  
terminals.  
B(SP3B):  
Sound is output from the two speakers in speaker system B (the surround back speakers).  
Multichannel sources will be downmixed to these two speakers.  
A&B(SP3AB): Sound is output from speaker system A speakers and the B speakers. Also, for FRONT BI-  
AMP playback.  
OFF(SP3 ): No sound is output from the speakers. Depending on the input signal and settings in  
SPEAKER SYSTEMS sound may be output from the subwoofer. The same sound is output  
from the pre out terminals as when selecting speaker system A (above).  
What is output from the subwoofer depends on the SPEAKER SETTING and the type of source.  
Depending on the settings in SPEAKER SETTING and the MULTI CH IN SELECT, output from the  
SURROUND BACK PRE OUT terminals may change.  
m em o  
When using headphones the speakers are switched off.  
Please use speakers with a nominal impedance rated 8 -16 .  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Other Functions  
Connecting Additional Am plifiers  
This receiver has more than sufficient power for any home use, but it is possible to add additional amplifiers to  
every channel of your system. Make the connections shown below to add amplifiers to power your speakers.  
Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from  
the AC outlet.  
ANALOG  
INPUT  
Pow ered subw oofer  
ASSIGNABLE  
PRE OUT  
ANALOG  
INPUT  
PCM/  
2DIGITAL /  
DTS  
AM LOOP  
FM UNBAL 75  
ANTENNA  
SUB  
WOOFER  
L
R
CENTER  
IN  
Front channel  
am plifier  
OUT1  
CONTROL  
OUT  
OUT2  
FRONT  
R
MONITOR OUT  
R
L
L
1
(TV/  
IN  
PLAY  
IN  
SUR-  
ROUND  
SAT)  
ANALOG  
INPUT  
IN  
R
L
2
(CD-R/  
CD-R/  
IN  
VCR1/  
DVR  
(Single)  
TAPE1  
SUR-  
L
R
ROUND  
BACK  
TAPE1)  
OUT  
REC  
OUT  
Surround channel  
am plifier  
R
L
L
FRONT  
3
PLAY  
IN  
IN  
(DVD/  
LD)  
IN  
R
MD/  
VCR2  
TAPE2  
ANALOG  
INPUT  
SUR-  
4
IN  
ROUND  
OUT  
REC  
OUT  
(CD)  
R
L
L
R
Surround back  
channel am plifier  
CD  
IN  
SUB  
WOOF-  
ER  
CEN-  
TER  
TV/  
SAT  
IN  
DIGITAL  
LINE  
IN  
SUR-  
DVD/  
LD  
ROUND  
BACK  
IN  
R
L
ANALOG  
INPUT  
R
L
R
L
VIDEO  
S
VIDO  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
MULTI CH IN  
Center channel  
am plifier (m ono)  
You can use the additional amplifier on the surround back channels for a single speaker as well. In this  
case plug the amplifier into the L (SINGLE) terminal only.  
memo  
The sound from the surround back terminals will depend on how you have set up the SURRBACK  
SYSTEM (see pages 35).  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Other Functions  
Multi Operations  
Multi operations allow you to tell the receiver and your other components to do a number of things with the  
push of only two buttons on the remote control (see "Performing Multi Operations" on the next page). For  
example, you can program the unit to turn on your TV, turn on your DVD player and start playing the loaded  
DVD. This allows you to freely decide which operations you want performed as well as the order in which you  
want them performed. The steps below show you how to program a string of up to 5 different operations for  
each MULTI CONTROL button. You don't need to program the power of this receiver (or any Pioneer  
component used) to go on, it (or they) will do so automatically when multi operations are performed.  
Be sure to set up each com ponent before program m ing m ulti operations (see “Setting Up the  
Rem ote Control to Control Other Com ponents", pages 5960).  
m em o  
To exit from the REMOTE SETUP m ode at anytim e press the REMOTE SETUP button.  
1 While holding dow n the REMOTE  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
MULTI  
OPERATION  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
SETUP button press  
to select the  
MULTI CONTROL  
m ulti operation setup m ode.  
The LED begins to blink.  
To cancel the multi operation setup mode press  
REMOTE SET UP.  
DVD/LD  
VCR 2  
TV/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
TV CONT  
2
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
INPUT  
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE MUSIC  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
SB CH  
MODE  
STEREO/  
ENTER  
MIDNIGHT  
DIRECT  
2 Select a MULTI CONTROL button for  
this m ulti operation.  
MUTE  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
MENU TUNER EDIT  
TOP MENU  
GUIDE  
The LED lights and remains lit.  
TUNE  
Each MULTI CONTROL button can be used for one  
multi operation. If a multi operation relates to using a  
DVD player, for example, it makes sense to select the  
DVD/LD button.  
SYSTEM  
SETUP  
ST  
ST  
ENTER  
TUNE  
AUDIO  
RETURN  
CHANNEL−  
DTV ON/OFF BAND  
CHANNEL+  
3 Press the operation button.  
D.ACCESS  
MPX  
CLASS  
1
1
for example 3 (play), you want to input.  
DIMMER  
SIGNAL SEL  
VIDEO SEL  
LOUDNESS  
DNR  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
ENTER  
BASS/TREBLE  
DISC  
+
HI-BIT  
+10  
TV CONTROL  
CHANNEL  
SUB TITLE  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
VOLUME  
RECEIVER  
Buttons that can be  
programmed with  
Multi Operations  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Other Functions  
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to input m ulti  
operations to the MULTI CONTROL  
button you pressed in step 3.  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
MULTI  
OPERATION  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
You can repeat this process for up to five  
com m ands.  
For exam ple : you could enter the following three  
operations using the preceding steps 2 and 3.  
1 Press the TV CONTROL button and TV (POWER)  
to turn on your TV (as explained above).  
2 Press the DVD/LD button then (POWER) to turn  
on your DVD player (if it is not a PIONEER product).  
3 Press the DVD/LD button then 3 (play) to start  
playing the DVD player.  
When you employ multi operations (see below), these  
three tasks will be performed in the same order.  
MULTI CONTROL  
DVD/LD  
VCR 2  
TV/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
TV CONT  
4-1  
4-2  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
INPUT  
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE MUSIC  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
SB CH  
MODE  
4-3  
STEREO/  
ENTER  
MIDNIGHT  
DIRECT  
MUTE  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
MENU TUNER EDIT  
TOP MENU  
GUIDE  
TUNE  
SYSTEM  
SETUP  
ST  
ST  
ENTER  
TUNE  
AUDIO  
RETURN  
CHANNEL−  
DTV ON/OFF BAND  
CHANNEL+  
5 Press the REMOTE SETUP button to  
exit the m ulti operation setup m ode.  
D.ACCESS  
MPX  
CLASS  
The remote control return to their previous operation  
modes.  
DIMMER  
SIGNAL SEL  
VIDEO SEL  
LOUDNESS  
DNR  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
ENTER  
BASS/TREBLE  
DISC  
+
HI-BIT  
+10  
TV CONTROL  
CHANNEL  
SUB TITLE  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
VOLUME  
5
You don't need to program power on for PIONEER  
m em o  
components (except for the first generation of Pioneer  
DVRs), they will go on automatically if a command for  
that unit is entered in the multi operations settings.  
Also, your TV will go on automatically if a TV related  
command is entered in the multi operations.  
RECEIVER  
Perform ing Multi Operations  
Do the following to use the MULTI OPERATIONS.  
1 Press the MULTI OPERATION  
button.  
1
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
MULTI  
OPERATION  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
MULTI CONTROL  
DVD/LD  
VCR 2  
TV/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
TV CONT  
2 Press the MULTI CONTROL button  
for the com ponent that has been set  
up w ith m ulti operations.  
2
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
INPUT  
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE MUSIC  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
SB CH  
MODE  
STEREO/  
The power of the receiver (and any Pioneer compo-  
nents use in the program) goes on and the pro-  
grammed multi operations are performed automati-  
cally.  
ENTER  
MIDNIGHT  
DIRECT  
MUTE  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Other Functions  
SYSTEM OFF  
The SYSTEM OFF feature allows you to tell the receiver and your other components to stop and/or turn off with  
the push of only one button on the remote control. For example, you can program the unit to turn off your TV  
and turn off your DVD player, etc. You don't need to program power off for PIONEER components, they will go  
off automatically in this mode. The receiver itself will go off automatically as well.  
The steps below show you how to program a string of up to 5 different SYSTEM OFF operations.  
Be sure to set up each com ponent before program m ing SYSTEM OFF operations (see Setting  
Up the Rem ote Control to Control Other Com ponents", pages 5960).  
m em o  
To exit from the REMOTE SETUP m ode at anytim e press the REMOTE SETUP button.  
1 While holding dow n the REMOTE  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
MULTI  
OPERATION  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
SETUP button press  
to select the  
4
2
MULTI CONTROL  
SYSTEM OFF setup m ode.  
The LED begins to blink.  
To cancel the SYSTEM OFF setup mode press RE-  
MOTE SET UP.  
DVD/LD  
VCR 2  
TV/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
TV CONT  
3
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
INPUT  
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE MUSIC  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
SB CH  
MODE  
STEREO/  
ENTER  
MIDNIGHT  
DIRECT  
MUTE  
2 Press the RECEIVER button.  
MASTER  
The LED lights and remains lit.  
VOLUME  
MENU TUNER EDIT  
TOP MENU  
GUIDE  
TUNE  
SYSTEM  
SETUP  
3 Select a MULTI CONTROL button for  
SYSTEM OFF.  
ST  
ST  
ENTER  
TUNE  
AUDIO  
RETURN  
Each MULTI CONTROL button can be used for  
SYSTEM OFF. If a SYSTEM OFF command relates to  
using a DVD player, for example, it makes sense to  
select the DVD/LD button.  
CHANNEL−  
DTV ON/OFF BAND  
CHANNEL+  
D.ACCESS  
MPX  
CLASS  
1
DIMMER  
SIGNAL SEL  
VIDEO SEL  
LOUDNESS  
DNR  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
ENTER  
4 Press the SOURCE  
button of the  
BASS/TREBLE  
DISC  
com ponent to be set w ith SYSTEM  
OFF operations.  
+
HI-BIT  
+10  
TV CONTROL  
CHANNEL  
SUB TITLE  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
VOLUME  
5 Press the REMOTE SETUP button to  
exit the SYSTEM OFF setup m ode.  
1,5  
The remote control return to their previous operation  
modes.  
RECEIVER  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Other Functions  
Using SYSTEM OFF  
Do the following to use the SYSTEM OFF function.  
The SYSTEM OFF feature allows you to tell the receiver and your other components to stop and/or turn off with  
the remote control. Most Pioneer components will automatically turn off. The receiver itself will go off  
automatically as well.  
The following Pioneer components can be turned off using the SYSTEM OFF function:  
DVD, DVD-Recorder, LD, CATV, CD, CD-R, MD, Satellite Tuner, Tape, Tuner, VCR, and TV.  
Be sure to set up each com ponent before program m ing m ulti operations (see Setting Up the  
Rem ote Control to Control Other Com ponents, pages 5960).  
m em o  
To exit from the REMOTE SETUP m ode at anytim e press the REMOTE SETUP button.  
1 Press the MULTI OPERATION button  
1
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
and w ithin 5 seconds press the  
RECEIVER button.  
All the Pioneer components connected to the receiver  
and the receiver will stop and/or go off.  
MULTI  
OPERATION  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
MULTI CONTROL  
DVD/LD  
VCR 2  
TV/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
TV CONT  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
INPUT  
1
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE MUSIC  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
SB CH  
MODE  
STEREO/  
ENTER  
MIDNIGHT  
DIRECT  
MUTE  
The PIONEER SR System : Operating other PIONEER  
com ponents  
Connecting an optional control cord allows you to operate other PIONEER components simply by pointing the  
receiver's remote control at the remote sensor on the front panel of the receiver. The receiver then sends the  
remote control signals to the other devices via the CONTROL OUT terminal.  
IN  
CONTROL  
CONTROL  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
Receiver  
PIONEER com ponent  
w ith an CONTROL  
term inals.  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
MULTI  
OPERATION  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
MULTI CONTROL  
TV SA DV  
DVD/LD  
/
T
V
C
R
/
R
T
R
V
C
E
O
N
T
VCR  
2
C
D
T
U
N
E
R
E
C
I
V
E
R
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
M
O
V
I
E
M
U
S
I
C
INPUT  
SURROUND  
MODE  
SB CH  
MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
STEREO/  
DIRECT  
ENTER  
MIDNIGHT  
MUTE  
MASTER  
OLUME  
V
M
E
N
U
T
U
N
E
R
E
D
I
T
TOP MENU  
T
U
N
E
SYSTEM  
SETUP  
GUIDE  
ST  
ST  
ENTER  
AU  
D
I
O
RETURN  
T
U
N
E
CHANNEL-  
D
T
V
O
N
/
O
F
F
B
A
N
D
CHANNEL+  
RF  
ATT  
D.ACCESS  
M
P
X
CLASS  
To CONTROL IN  
term inal of another  
PIONEER com ponent  
w ith an CONTROL  
term inals.  
DIMMER  
LOUDNESS  
DNR  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
ENTER  
SIGNAL SEL  
VIDEO SEL  
BASS/TREBLE  
DISC  
+
HI-BIT  
+10  
-
T
V
CONTROL  
SUB TITLE  
CHANNEL  
VOLUME  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
Rem ote Control  
RECEIVER  
m em o  
You can also control PIONEER components (and those made by other manufacturers) by pointing the  
receiver's remote control directly at the respective component. This type of operation does not re-  
quire control cords. All you have to do is recall the appropriate stored settings (see page 59).  
If you use a remote control hooked up via the CONTROL IN jack with a control cord, you won't be able  
to use this unit's remote control.  
If you use this feature make sure an analog (audio and/or video) connection has been made between  
the units.  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Other Functions  
Resetting the Rem ote Control  
The following operations allow you to erase the settings stored in the remote control.  
Erasing Multi Operations  
DIMMER  
SIGNAL SEL  
VIDEO SEL  
LOUDNESS  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
ENTER  
1 Press and hold both the REMOTE  
DNR  
BASS/TREBLE  
DISC  
1
+
HI-BIT  
+10  
SETUP button and  
than 3 seconds.  
for m ore  
TV CONTROL  
CHANNEL  
SUB TITLE  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
VOLUME  
LED lights will blink 3 times and all multi operation  
settings will be erased.  
1
RECEIVER  
Erasing Learned Rem ote Control Com m ands  
DIMMER  
SIGNAL SEL  
VIDEO SEL  
LOUDNESS  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
ENTER  
1 Press and hold both the REMOTE  
DNR  
BASS/TREBLE  
DISC  
+
HI-BIT  
+10  
1
1
SETUP button and  
than 3 seconds.  
for m ore  
TV CONTROL  
CHANNEL  
SUB TITLE  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
VOLUME  
LED lights will blink 3 times and all learned remote  
control commands will be erased.  
RECEIVER  
Erasing All Rem ote Control settings  
DIMMER  
SIGNAL SEL  
VIDEO SEL  
LOUDNESS  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
ENTER  
1 Press and hold both the REMOTE  
DNR  
BASS/TREBLE  
DISC  
+
HI-BIT  
+10  
SETUP button and  
than 3 seconds.  
for m ore  
1
1
TV CONTROL  
CHANNEL  
SUB TITLE  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
VOLUME  
LED lights will blink 3 times and all remote control  
settings will be erased.  
RECEIVER  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Other Functions  
Resetting the Main Unit  
The following operations allow you to reset the unit to the default settings.  
AUDIO/ VIDEO  
M
ULTI-CHAN  
N
EL  
R
ECEIVER VS X-4  
3
TX  
1 While holding dow n the TONE  
button press the STANDBY/ ON  
button for about three seconds.  
STANDBY/ ON  
S
TAN  
D
B
Y
MOVIE  
MUSI  
C
ENTER  
STEREO/ DIRECT MULTI CH  
I
N
ACOUSTI EQ  
C
MULTI  
J
OG  
MASTER VOLUME  
M
ULTI  
J
OG CONTROL  
RETURN  
STATION TUNING  
TUNER  
EDI  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI  
-
BI  
T
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
HI-  
SAMPLING  
M
IDNIGHT  
LOUDNESS  
BAND  
CLASS  
SELECT  
T
M
ULTI J OG/ ENTER  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/ TREBL  
P
HONES  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
E
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
I
NPUT  
2 When you see RESET? appear in  
the display, press the TONE –  
button. OK? appears in the  
display, press TONE +.  
1
1
When OK appears in the display all the settings,  
including the speaker, surround sound settings  
and tuner settings, will be reset in the unit to the  
factory default settings.  
MULTI  
J
OG CONTROL  
RETURN  
STATION TUNING  
TUNER  
EDIT  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
MIDNIGHT  
LOUDNESS  
BAND  
CLASS  
SELECT  
MULTI J OG/ ENTER  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/ TREBLE  
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
VIDEO INPUT  
2 2  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fine Tuning Your System  
Other System Settings  
These settings are more advanced. Some could add depth or listenability to your sound (like the THX CINEMA  
setup) and others are for your convenience (like the FUNCTION RENAME). You can decide if you want to make  
these settings or not. They are not crucial to good surround sound. You only need to make these settings once  
(unless you change the placement of your current speaker system, add new speakers or components to your  
system, etc.). Use the arrow buttons (5∞) and the ENTER button on the remote control to navigate the  
display on the receiver. Conversely, you can use the MULTI JOG dial and ENTER button on the front panel.  
2 Press the SYSTEM SETUP  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
MULTI  
OPERATION  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
button.  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
MULTI CONTROL  
AUTO  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
RF  
DVD/LD  
VCR 2  
TV/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
TV CONT  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
INPUT  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
1
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
LS  
RS  
MOVIE MUSIC  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
SB CH  
MODE  
This display appears on the receiver.  
STEREO/  
ENTER  
MIDNIGHT  
DIRECT  
MUTE  
3 Follow the order below to m ake  
advance settings. Use the 5∞  
buttons to choose a m enu. When  
you have the setup you w ant  
press ENTER.  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
MENU TUNER EDIT  
TOP MENU  
GUIDE  
TUNE  
2
SYSTEM  
SETUP  
ST  
ST  
ENTER  
TUNE  
3
AUDIO  
RETURN  
CHANNEL−  
DTV ON/OFF BAND  
CHANNEL+  
In each mode, the current settings are dis-  
played automatically.  
D.ACCESS  
MPX  
CLASS  
THX CINEMA Setup (page 75)  
DIMMER  
SIGNAL SEL  
VIDEO SEL  
LOUDNESS  
DNR  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
ENTER  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
DSP  
SB CH  
BASS/TREBLE  
DISC  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
+
HI-BIT  
+10  
This setup lets you choose which multichannel  
decoding method, from stereo sources, the  
receiver will use for THX CINEMA.  
TV CONTROL  
CHANNEL  
SUB TITLE  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
VOLUME  
INPUT ASSIGN (page 76–77)  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
DSP  
SB CH  
RECEIVER  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
If you hook up your digital components in a  
different way than the default settings you need  
to tell the receiver how you hooked them up so  
the names on the remote control and front panel  
match your home setup. Do this with the  
DIGITAL–IN SELECT setup. Also, if you hooked  
up video devices with component video cable you  
need to tell the receiver which devices are hook  
up in this way. Do this with the COMPONENT–IN  
SELECT setup.  
RETURN button  
3 2  
STANDBY/ ON  
S
TAN  
D
B
Y
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
MULTI  
J
OG  
MULTI  
J
OG CONTROL  
RETURN  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
MIDNIGHT  
LOUDNESS  
BAND  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/ TREBLE  
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
FUNCTION RENAME (page 78)  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
This feature allows you to change the names that  
appear in the receiver display to reflect what you  
have connected.  
1 Turn on the receiver, press the  
RECEIVER button on the rem ote  
control.  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fine Tuning Your System  
THX CINEMA Setup  
This setup lets you choose which decoding method for 2 channel sources the receiver will use for THX  
CINEMA. The three THX CINEMA decoding methods are; PRO LOGIC II MOVIE, PRO LOGIC and NEO:6  
CINEMA. For more information on the decoding (playback) formats see "Techno Tidbits" on page 88.  
2 Press the SYSTEM SETUP  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
MULTI  
OPERATION  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
button.  
MULTI CONTROL  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
AUTO  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
RF  
DVD/LD  
VCR 2  
TV/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
TV CONT  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
INPUT  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
1
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
LS  
RS  
MOVIE MUSIC  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
SB CH  
MODE  
This display appears on the receiver.  
STEREO/  
ENTER  
MIDNIGHT  
DIRECT  
MUTE  
MASTER  
3 Looking at the display on your  
receiver, use the 5∞ buttons to  
select THX CINEMA SETUP.  
Press the ENTER button.  
VOLUME  
MENU TUNER EDIT  
TOP MENU  
GUIDE  
TUNE  
2
SYSTEM  
SETUP  
ST  
ST  
ENTER  
TUNE  
3-6  
AUDIO  
RETURN  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
CHANNEL−  
DTV ON/OFF BAND  
CHANNEL+  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
D.ACCESS  
MPX  
CLASS  
DIMMER  
SIGNAL SEL  
VIDEO SEL  
LOUDNESS  
DNR  
TONE  
EFFECT/CH SEL  
ENTER  
4 Use the 5∞ buttons to choose a  
THX CINEMA decoding m ethod.  
Press the ENTER button.  
BASS/TREBLE  
DISC  
+
HI-BIT  
+10  
TV CONTROL  
CHANNEL  
SUB TITLE  
PRO LOGIC II MOVIE is selected.  
REMOTE  
SETUP  
VOLUME  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
dB  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
RECEIVER  
PRO LOGIC is selected.  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
3-5 2  
RETURN button  
NEO:6 CINEMA is selected.  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
DSP  
STANDBY/ ON  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
S
TAN  
D
B
Y
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
MULTI  
J
OG  
MULTI  
J
OG CONTROL  
RETURN  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
MIDNIGHT  
LOUDNESS  
BAND  
5 EXIT should be selected (if not,  
use the 5∞ buttons to select it).  
Press ENTER.  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/ TREBLE  
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
6 Use the 5∞ buttons to select  
EXIT and press ENTER, again.  
This exits the SYSTEM SETUP mode and returns  
to normal operation.  
(If you are continuing from page 74 you can skip  
the first tw o steps.)  
1 Turn on the receiver, press the  
RECEIVER button on the rem ote  
control.  
m em o  
The default is PRO LOGIC ll MOVIE.  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fine Tuning Your System  
Assigning the Digital Inputs  
If you did not hook up your digital equipment in accordance with the default settings for the digital inputs  
(see page 16,18 & 21) you need to complete the procedure below. You have to do this in order to tell the  
receiver what digital equipment is hooked up to which terminal so the buttons on the remote correspond  
to what you have hooked up.  
DVD/LD  
TV/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
TV CONT  
5 Use the 5∞ buttons to m ove  
through the different digital input  
settings and press the ENTER  
button.  
VCR 2  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
INPUT  
1
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE MUSIC  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
SB CH  
MODE  
STEREO/  
ENTER  
MIDNIGHT  
DIRECT  
MUTE  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
MASTER  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
VOLUME  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
MENU TUNER EDIT  
TOP MENU  
GUIDE  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
TUNE  
2
SYSTEM  
SETUP  
ST  
ST  
ENTER  
TUNE  
The available digital input settings are:  
DIGI-1: TV/SAT, DIGI-2: CD-R,  
DIGI-3: DVD/LD, DIGI-4: CD  
3-9  
AUDIO  
RETURN  
The selected setting will blink.  
3-9 2  
RETURN button  
6 Use the 5∞ buttons select the  
com ponent that you hooked up  
to that digital in. Press the  
ENTER button.  
STANDBY/ ON  
S
TAN  
D
B
Y
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
MULTI  
J
OG  
MULTI  
J
OG CONTROL  
RETURN  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
MIDNIGHT  
LOUDNESS  
BAND  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/ TREBLE  
PHONES  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
If you're not sure which component is connected  
to which digital in, look on the back of the  
receiver and check the cables you connected.  
(If you are continuing from page 74 you can skip  
the first tw o steps.)  
7 Repeat steps 5-6 to change other  
digital input settings.  
1 Turn on the receiver, press the  
RECEIVER button on the rem ote  
control.  
8 When you're finished use the 5∞  
buttons to select EXIT and press  
ENTER.  
2 Press the SYSTEM SETUP  
button.  
This exits the DIGITAL-IN SELECT mode.  
9 Use the 5∞ buttons to select  
EXIT and press ENTER, again.  
Then, use the 5∞ buttons to  
select EXIT and press ENTER.  
3 Looking at the display on your  
receiver, use the 5∞ buttons to  
select INPUT ASSIGN. Press the  
ENTER button.  
This exits the SYSTEM SETUP mode and returns  
to normal operation.  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
m em o  
4 DIGITAL-IN should be selected, if  
not use the 5∞ buttons to select  
it. Press the ENTER button.  
The possible digital inputs that can be assigned are:  
DVD/LD, TV/SAT, VCR1, VCR2, CD, CD-R, MD.  
If you assign a digital input to a certain function (for  
example DVD/LD) then any digital inputs previously  
assigned to that function will automatically be set to  
OFF. This is because one function cannot be assigned  
to two different places.  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
76  
LS  
RS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fine Tuning Your System  
Assigning the Com ponent Video Inputs  
This receiver has two component video inputs. Their default settings are video inputs for the DVD/LD  
(COMPONENT VIDEO IN 1) and TV/SAT (COMPONENT VIDEO IN 2) functions, but you can reassign  
them if you want to use them as video inputs for other receiver functions (for example a VCR).  
See pages 1518 for more on connecting equipment using component video cords.  
DVD/LD  
TV/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
TV CONT  
VCR 2  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
INPUT  
5 Use the 5∞ buttons to select the  
com ponent video input you  
w ant to reassign. Press the  
ENTER button.  
1
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE MUSIC  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
SB CH  
MODE  
STEREO/  
ENTER  
MIDNIGHT  
DIRECT  
MUTE  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
MENU TUNER EDIT  
TOP MENU  
GUIDE  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
TUNE  
2
SYSTEM  
SETUP  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
ST  
ST  
ENTER  
TUNE  
3-8  
The available component video inputs are:  
COMPO-1: DVD/LD, COMPO-2: TV/SAT  
In the example above, we would select Compo-  
1.  
AUDIO  
RETURN  
3-8 2  
RETURN button  
The selected component video input blinks.  
6 Use the 5∞ buttons to assign a  
STANDBY/ ON  
receiver function.  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
S
TAN  
D
B
Y
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
MULTI  
J
OG  
MULTI  
J
OG CONTROL  
RETURN  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
MIDNIGHT  
LOUDNESS  
BAND  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/ TREBLE  
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
Choose between DVD/LD, TV/SAT, VCR1 and  
VCR2.  
In the example above, we would select VCR1.  
(If you are continuing from page 74 you can skip  
the first tw o steps.)  
7 When youre finished use the  
5∞ buttons to select EXIT and  
press ENTER.  
1 Turn on the receiver, press the  
RECEIVER button on the rem ote  
control.  
You will leave the "COMPONENT-IN SELECT"  
mode.  
8 Use the 5∞ buttons to select  
EXIT and press ENTER, again.  
Then, use the 5∞ buttons to  
select EXIT and press ENTER.  
2 Press the SYSTEM SETUP  
button.  
3 Looking at the display on your  
receiver, use the 5∞ buttons to  
select INPUT ASSIGN. Press the  
ENTER button.  
This exits the SYSTEM SETUP mode and returns  
to normal operation.  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
m em o  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
If you connect any source component to the  
receiver using a component video input, you  
should also have your TV connected to this  
receiver's component video output.  
4 Use the 5∞ buttons to select  
COMPONENT-IN then press  
ENTER.  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
77  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fine Tuning Your System  
FUNCTION RENAME  
Use the FUNCTION RENAME capability to rename the display on the receiver for different functions (DVD, etc.).  
For example, you could rename DVD/LD as DVR-7000. For this setup in particular using the controls on the front  
panel is more convenient than using the remote control. Use the MULTI JOG dial instead of the 5∞ buttons and  
use the ENTER button on the front panel.  
RETURN button  
3-9 2  
5 Use the MULTI J OG to cycle the  
cursor through the letters,  
num bers and sym bols. Use the  
STANDBY/ ON  
S
TAN  
D
B
Y
ENTER button to enter one of the  
possibilities or m ove forw ard a  
space.  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
MULTI  
J
OG  
MULTI  
J
OG CONTROL  
RETURN  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
MIDNIGHT  
LOUDNESS  
BAND  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/ TREBLE  
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
The possible selections are shown below.  
(If you are continuing from page 74 you can skip  
the first tw o steps.)  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ  
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz  
0123456789  
1 Turn on the receiver. (If you  
w ant to use the rem ote control  
for this setup, press the  
!#$% &()*+,./:;<=>?@[ \ ]ˆ_{|} [space]  
RECEIVER button.)  
6 Repeat step 5 until you get the  
nam e as you w ant it.  
2 Press the SET UP button.  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
DSP  
SB CH  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
You can input up to ten characters.  
This display appears on the receiver.  
7 Press ENTER repeatedly to exit  
the nam e. The new function  
nam e is set.  
3 Looking at the display on your  
receiver, use the MULTI J OG to  
select FUNCTION RENAME.  
Press the ENTER button.  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
8 Repeat steps 4-7 to change other  
function nam es. Use the MULTI  
J OG to select EXIT and press  
ENTER.  
LS  
RS  
4 Use the MULTI J OG to select the  
nam e of the function (for  
exam ple, DVD/ LD) you w ant to  
change. Press ENTER.  
9 Use the MULTI J OG to select  
EXIT and press ENTER.  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
This exits the SYSTEM SETUP mode and returns  
to normal operation.  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
Either the cursor underline bar or a character  
(depending on which is selected) will blink.  
m em o  
Use the RETURN button to move the  
cursor back one character when entering  
a name.  
The functions are divided into three different on-  
screen displays so you may have to move  
through them to find the function you want to  
rename.  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fine Tuning Your System  
Expert Setup  
The settings here can only be done if you've performed the more basic preliminary setups. Thus, before doing  
these settings do either QUICK setup (page 13) or NORMAL setup (page 36-40).  
These settings are to further heighten your enjoyment of surround sound. They are not absolutely necessary but  
may give more defined and enjoyable surround sound. You can decide if you want to make these settings or  
not. You only need to make these settings once (unless you change the placement of your current speaker  
system, add new speakers or components to your system, etc.). View these settings on the receiver display.  
Use the arrow buttons (5∞) and the ENTER button on the remote control to navigate the display on the  
receiver. Conversely, you can use the MULTI JOG dial and ENTER button on the front panel.  
DVD/LD  
TV/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
TV CONT  
5 Follow the order below to m ake  
expert settings. Use the 5∞  
buttons to navigate through the  
m enus. When you have the  
setting you w ant in particular  
m enu, press ENTER.  
VCR 2  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
INPUT  
1
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE MUSIC  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
SB CH  
MODE  
STEREO/  
ENTER  
MIDNIGHT  
DIRECT  
MUTE  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
MENU TUNER EDIT  
TOP MENU  
GUIDE  
In each mode the current settings are displayed  
by the receiver.  
TUNE  
2
SYSTEM  
SETUP  
ST  
ST  
ENTER  
TUNE  
3-5  
CROSSOVER NETWORK (page 80)  
AUDIO  
RETURN  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
This feature determines which frequencies will  
be sent to the subwoofer (or large speakers).  
3-5 2  
FINE CHANNEL LEVEL (page 81)  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
STANDBY/ ON  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
S
TAN  
D
B
Y
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
MULTI  
J
OG  
This feature balances the sound output level of your  
speakers more finely than in the NORMAL setup.  
MULTI  
J
OG CONTROL  
RETURN  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
MIDNIGHT  
LOUDNESS  
BAND  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/ TREBLE  
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
FINE CHANNEL DELAY (page 82–83)  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
This feature adjusts the delay level of your speak-  
ers more finely than in the NORMAL setup.  
1 Turn on the receiver and press  
the RECEIVER button on the  
rem ote control.  
ACOUSTIC CAL EQ (page 84–85)  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
2 Press the SYSTEM SETUP  
button.  
This feature allows you to adjust the amount of a  
certain frequency in a soundtrack, acting as a  
kind of room equalizer for your speakers.  
BASS PEAK LEVEL (page 86)  
3 Select SURROUND SETUP w ith  
the 5∞ buttons. Press the ENTER  
button.  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
Dolby Digital and DTS audio sources include  
ultra-low bass tones. Set the bass peak level as  
needed to prevent the ultra-low bass tones from  
distorting the sound from the speakers.  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
DYNAMIC RANGE CONTROL (page 87)  
4 Select EXPERT w ith the 5∞  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
DSP  
buttons. Press the ENTER button.  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
This feature makes possible excellent surround  
sound effects when listening to Dolby Digital and  
DTS sources at low volumes.  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fine Tuning Your System  
CROSSOVER NETWORK  
Crossover frequency is the point where the receiver divides the high and low sounds (the frequencies) between  
the speakers. Certain bass sounds will play back from the subwoofer if you selected it as YES (or PLUS) or from  
the front speakers if you selected them as LARGE. This setting decides where the cutoff will be between those  
bass sounds playing back from the speaker selected as above and the bass sounds for the entire soundtrack,  
which play back from all speakers used.  
If all speakers are set to LARGE (see pages 37–38) this setup is unnecessary.  
2 Use the 5∞ buttons to select  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
MULTI  
OPERATION  
SYSTEM  
OFF  
frequency cut off point. Press  
ENTER.  
50 Hz: Sends bass frequencies below 50 Hz to  
the subwoofer (or large speakers).  
MULTI CONTROL  
DVD/LD  
VCR 2  
TV/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
TV CONT  
CD  
TUNER  
RECEIVER  
INPUT  
ACOUSTIC  
EQ  
MOVIE MUSIC  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
SURROUND  
MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
SB CH  
MODE  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
STEREO/  
LS  
RS  
ENTER  
MIDNIGHT  
DIRECT  
MUTE  
80 Hz: Sends bass frequencies below 80 Hz to  
the subwoofer (or large speakers).  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
MENU TUNER EDIT  
TOP MENU  
GUIDE  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
TUNE  
SYSTEM  
SETUP  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
ST  
ST  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
ENTER  
TUNE  
LS  
RS  
1-3  
AUDIO  
RETURN  
100 Hz: Sends bass frequencies below 100 Hz to  
the subwoofer (or large speakers).  
CHANNEL−  
DTV ON/OFF BAND  
CHANNEL+  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
D.ACCESS  
MPX  
CLASS  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
150 Hz: Sends bass frequencies below 150 Hz to  
the subwoofer (or large speakers).  
1-3  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
STANDBY/ ON  
200 Hz: Sends bass frequencies below 200 Hz to  
S
TAN  
D
B
Y
the subwoofer (or large speakers).  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
MULTI  
J
OG  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
MULTI OG CONTROL  
J
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
RETURN  
MIDNIGHT  
LOUDNESS  
BAND  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
DSP  
SB CH  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/ TREBLE  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
3 EXIT should be selected (if it's  
not use the 5∞ buttons to select  
it). Press ENTER.  
Follow steps 1-5 on page 79, if necessary, to get  
to the starting point m entioned here.  
Next, proceed to FINE CHANNEL LEVEL.  
If you w ant to change a setting before pro-  
ceeding  
1 CROSSOVER should be selected,  
if it isnt use the 5∞ buttons to  
select it. Press ENTER.  
start over from step 1.  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
m em o  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
The default is 80Hz.  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fine Tuning Your System  
FINE CHANNEL LEVEL  
The following steps show you how to balance the sound output level of your speakers more finely than in the  
NORMAL setup (see page 36). Proper speaker balance is essential for obtaining high quality surround sound and  
the better the speaker balance the better surround sound you can get. Do this procedure if you want to try and  
get even finer surround sound.  
The main difference with this setup method and the CHANNEL LEVEL setup method in NORMAL setup is that  
here the test tone alternates between the front left speaker (which is used as the reference channel) and the  
target speaker (that is, the speaker whose level you want to adjust). Listen to the two tones and try to make  
them the same volume.  
MASTER  
The adjustable channels are:  
VOLUME  
R (Front right), C (Center), LS (Surround left), RS  
(Surround right), SBL (Surround back left), SBR  
(Surround back right) and SW (Subwoofer).  
MENU TUNER EDIT  
TOP MENU  
GUIDE  
TUNE  
SYSTEM  
SETUP  
ST  
ST  
ENTER  
TUNE  
1-5  
AUDIO  
RETURN  
3 Adjust the level of the channel  
CHANNEL  
DTV ON/OFF BAND  
CHANNEL+  
using the 5∞ buttons.  
D.ACCESS  
MPX  
CLASS  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
LOUDNESS  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
Neo :6  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
1-5  
Try to get the volume level of the target speaker  
to match that of the front left speaker, which is  
the reference in this setup. The levels can be set  
within a range of 10 dB to +10 dB in 0.5 dB  
steps.  
STANDBY/ ON  
S
TAN  
D
B
Y
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
When you press ENTER you will automatically go  
to the next channel.  
MULTI  
J
OG  
MULTI  
J
OG CONTROL  
RETURN  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
MIDNIGHT  
LOUDNESS  
BAND  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/ TREBLE  
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
4 Press ENTER to select a new  
channel. Repeat step 3 for every  
channel.  
If you w ant to change a setting before  
proceeding  
Use the 5∞ buttons to go back to the channel  
you want to adjust and press ENTER. Then  
follow step 3.  
Follow steps 1-5 on page 79, if necessary, to get  
to the starting point m entioned here.  
1 FINE CH LEVEL should be  
selected, if it isnt use the 5∞  
buttons to select it. Press ENTER.  
5 When done select EXIT (if it's not  
already selected) and press  
ENTER.  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
LS  
RS  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
2 Use the 5∞ buttons to select the  
channel you w ant to adjust.  
Press ENTER.  
Next, if you want, proceed to FINE CHANNEL  
DELAY.  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
Test tones will be output.  
WARNING : Be prepared! The test tones are  
output at a high volum e level.  
MASTER VOLUME rotates to the reference  
position (0 dB) and the display on the receiver  
flashes TEST TONE. After a few seconds the test  
tone is output.  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fine Tuning Your System  
FINE CHANNEL DELAY  
The following steps show you how to adjust the delay level of your speakers more finely than in the NORMAL  
setup (see page 36). Adding a slight delay to some speakers is necessary to achieve proper sound depth,  
separation as well as an effective surround sound effect. Do this procedure if you want to try and get even finer  
surround sound.  
The main difference with this setup method and the CHANNEL DELAY setup method in NORMAL setup is that  
here the test tone sounds from a reference channel and you use that to measure the target speaker (that is, the  
speaker whose level you want to adjust).  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
3 Use the 5∞ buttons to select the  
MENU TUNER EDIT  
TOP MENU  
GUIDE  
channel you w ant to adjust.  
Press ENTER.  
TUNE  
SYSTEM  
SETUP  
ST  
ST  
ENTER  
TUNE  
1-6  
AUDIO  
RETURN  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
CHANNEL  
DTV ON/OFF BAND  
CHANNEL+  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
D.ACCESS  
MPX  
CLASS  
Test tones will be output.  
The adjustable channels are:  
R (Front right), C (Center), LS (Surround left), RS  
(Surround right), SBL (Surround back left), SBR  
(Surround back right) and SW (Subwoofer).  
1-6  
4 Adjust the level of each channel  
STANDBY/ ON  
S
TAN  
D
B
Y
using the 5∞ buttons.  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
MULTI  
J
OG  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
MULTI OG CONTROL  
J
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
RETURN  
MIDNIGHT  
LOUDNESS  
BAND  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/ TREBLE  
PHONES  
DSP  
SB CH  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
Listen to the reference channel and use it to  
measure the target channel. Stand facing the two  
speakers with your arms outstretched pointing at  
each speaker. Try to make the two tones sound  
as if they are arriving simultaneously at a postion  
slightly in front of you and between your arm  
span.  
Follow steps 1-5 on page 79, if necessary, to get  
to the starting point m entioned here.  
1 FINE CH DELAY should be  
selected, if it isnt use the 5∞  
buttons to select it. Press ENTER.  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
2 Use the 5∞ buttons to adjust  
the distance of the FRONT L  
channel. Press ENTER.  
The distance can be set within a range of 0.5 to  
45 feet in 0.5 foot steps.  
When you press ENTER you will automatically go  
to the next channel.  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
Test tones will be output.  
This channel will be the target distance which  
you use to measure the other channels.  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fine Tuning Your System  
5 Press ENTER to select a new  
channel. Repeat step 4 for every  
channel.  
If you w ant to change a setting before pro-  
ceeding  
Use the 5∞ buttons to go back to the channel  
you want to adjust and press ENTER. Then follow  
step 3.  
6 When done select EXIT (if it's not  
already selected) and press  
ENTER.  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
Next, if you want, proceed to ACOUSTIC CAL  
EQ.  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fine Tuning Your System  
ACOUSTIC CAL EQ  
This setting is a kind of room equalizer for your speakers. This receiver let's you equalize the speakers in  
accordance with the front speakers.  
The front left speaker will serve as the reference tone. The front left tone and the target speaker (the one you  
are trying to adjust) will sound in turns, so you can judge which needs to be louder.  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
2 Use the 5∞ buttons to select the  
MENU TUNER EDIT  
TOP MENU  
GUIDE  
TUNE  
channel that you w ant to adjust.  
Press ENTER.  
SYSTEM  
SETUP  
ST  
ST  
ENTER  
TUNE  
1-10  
AUDIO  
RETURN  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
CHANNEL−  
DTV ON/OFF BAND  
CHANNEL+  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
D.ACCESS  
MPX  
CLASS  
The adjustable channels are:  
Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surr Back  
(surround back) L, Surr Back (surround back) R.  
1-10  
3 Use the 5∞ buttons to select the  
frequency you w ant to adjust.  
Press ENTER.  
STANDBY/ ON  
S
TAN  
D
B
Y
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
MULTI  
J
OG  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MULTI  
J
OG CONTROL  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
DSP  
SET UP  
RETURN  
MIDNIGHT  
LOUDNESS  
BAND  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/ TREBLE  
PHONES  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
LS  
RS  
The adjustable frequencys are:  
63Hz, 125Hz, 250Hz, 4kHz, 11.3kHz.  
For the speakers you set to SMALL (see pages  
3738) you won't be able to adjust the 63 Hz  
setting.  
Follow steps 1-5 on page 79, if necessary, to get  
to the starting point m entioned here.  
4 Use the 5∞ buttons to adjust  
the frequency. When you have it  
at the level you w ant press  
ENTER.  
1 ACOUSTIC CAL should be  
selected, if it isnt use the 5∞  
buttons to select and press  
ENTER.  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
Set the frequencies within the 6 dB to +6 dB  
range in steps of 0.5 dB. If OVER appears in the  
display you have set the levels too high. Reduce  
them until OVER disappears.  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
Test tones will be output.  
WARNING: the test tones are very loud!!  
Make sure there are no infants or small children  
in the room and that no one who will be scared,  
upset or damaged by loud noise is present. You  
yourself may want to wear earplugs.  
5 The cursor autom atically goes to  
the next frequency. Press ENTER  
and repeat steps 4 & 5 to adjust  
all the frequencies.  
ACOUSTIC CAL EQ: All speakers (except for  
the subwoofer) are set in accordance with the  
settings of the FRONT speakers. You can adjust  
each speaker individually to suit your taste. This  
setting allows the listener to enjoy a sound  
balance defined by the front speakers (the main  
speakers for home theater). The front left  
speaker will serve as the reference tone. The  
front left tone and the target speaker (the one  
you are trying to adjust) will sound in turns, so  
you can judge which needs to be louder.  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fine Tuning Your System  
6 TRIM should be selected (if it  
isnt use the 5∞ buttons to  
select it) and press ENTER.  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
7 Use the 5∞ buttons to adjust  
the TRIM and press ENTER.  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
TRIM will balance the volume level of each  
frequency in the overall volume of that speaker.  
8 EXIT should be selected (if it isnt  
use the 5∞ buttons to select it)  
and press ENTER.  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
9
The cursor autom atically goes to  
the next channel. Press ENTER  
and repeat steps 38 to adjust all  
the channels.  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
10 EXIT should be selected (if it isnt  
use the 5∞ buttons to select it)  
and press ENTER.  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
Next, if you want, proceed to BASS PEAK LEVEL.  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fine Tuning Your System  
BASS PEAK LEVEL  
The LFE (Low Frequency Effect) channel in Dolby Digital and DTS program sources can produce heavily  
concentrated ultra-low bass tones that may exceed the capabilities of your speaker system. The following steps  
show you how to set the peak level for the LFE channel. If continuing from the preceding page the BASS PEAK  
LEVEL should be selected.  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
3 Use the 5∞ buttons to adjust the  
MENU TUNER EDIT  
TOP MENU  
GUIDE  
TUNE  
test tones and specify the bass  
peak level.  
SYSTEM  
SETUP  
ST  
ST  
ENTER  
TUNE  
1-5  
AUDIO  
RETURN  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
CHANNEL−  
DTV ON/OFF BAND  
CHANNEL+  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
D.ACCESS  
MPX  
CLASS  
If you set this level before the receiver  
will have that level input but it will not appear on  
this setup screen. (The screen will always open  
with the level showing [- - -].)  
1-5  
1 Raise the level gradually.  
STANDBY/ ON  
2 Set the bass peak level at the point just before  
the tone starts to distort.  
S
TAN  
D
B
Y
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
Be careful! Test tones play back at loud  
volum es . Make sure there are no infants or  
sm all children in the room at distortion level.  
MULTI  
J
OG  
MULTI  
J
OG CONTROL  
RETURN  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
MIDNIGHT  
LOUDNESS  
BAND  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/ TREBLE  
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
You can leave this setup any tim e by pressing  
ENTER.  
If the YES or PLUS setting on the subwoofer is  
selected the test tone will only play back from the  
subwoofer. If not, the test tone will play back  
from all speakers set to LARGE except for the  
subwoofer.  
Follow steps 1-5 on page 79, if necessary, to get  
to the starting point m entioned here.  
1 BASSPEAK LEVEL should be  
selected, if it isnt use the 5∞  
buttons to select it. Press  
ENTER.  
4 Press ENTER.  
The display on the receiver will show RESUME  
and the MASTER VOLUME will return to its  
original position.  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
5 EXIT should be selected (if it isnt  
use the 5∞ buttons to select it)  
and press ENTER.  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
2 Use the 5∞ buttons to select  
SETTING START or SETTING  
CANCEL. Press ENTER.  
Next, if you want, proceed to DYNAMIC RANGE  
CONTROL  
SETTING START: The MASTER VOLUME is set  
to MIN (----dB), a test tone plays back and you  
make the setting (go to step 3).  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
SETTING CANCEL: This setting won't limit the  
peak level of the LFE channel.  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
If you selected SETTING CANCEL go to step 4.  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fine Tuning Your System  
DYNAMIC RANGE CONTROL  
This feature makes it possible to enjoy full surround sound effects on Dolby Digital and DTS sources even at low  
volumes. It does this by compressing the dynamic range. Dynamic range is the difference between the loudest  
and the softest sounds in any given signal. Compressing the range plays sounds so the quieter ones are audible  
and the louder ones dont get distorted or become overpowering. This feature only applies to Dolby Digital and  
DTS sources but the MIDNIGHT mode (explained on page 48) accomplishes the same end for a variety of  
sources. If continuing from BASS PEAK LEVEL, DYNAMIC RANGE CONTROL should be selected.  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
3 EXIT should be selected (if it  
MENU TUNER EDIT  
TOP MENU  
GUIDE  
TUNE  
isnt use the 5∞ buttons to  
select it) and press ENTER.  
SYSTEM  
SETUP  
ST  
ST  
ENTER  
TUNE  
1-6  
AUDIO  
RETURN  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
DSP  
SB CH  
CHANNEL  
DTV ON/OFF BAND  
CHANNEL+  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
D.ACCESS  
MPX  
CLASS  
Dynamic Range Control is set. Go on to the next  
setting.  
You may need to experiment with different Dolby  
Digital and DTS sources before you can use the  
DYNAMIC RANGE CONTROL setting to suit your  
low volume listening needs.  
1-6  
STANDBY/ ON  
S
TAN  
D
B
Y
4 You are now finished w ith  
EXPERT SETUP, EXIT should be  
selected (if it isnt use the 5∞  
buttons to select it), press  
ENTER.  
MOVIE  
MUSIC  
ENTER  
MULTI  
J
OG  
MULTI  
J
OG CONTROL  
RETURN  
SIGNAL  
SELECT  
HI-BIT  
HI-SAMPLING  
SB CH  
MODE  
SET UP  
MIDNIGHT  
LOUDNESS  
BAND  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/ TREBLE  
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
TONE  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
Follow steps 1-5 on page 79, if necessary, to get  
to the starting point m entioned here.  
LS  
RS  
5 EXIT should be selected (if it  
isnt use the 5∞ buttons to  
select it), press ENTER.  
1 D-RANGE CTRL should be  
selected, if it isnt use the 5∞  
buttons to select it. Press ENTER.  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
6 Use the 5∞ buttons to select  
EXIT, press ENTER.  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
The receiver returns to normal operation.  
2 Use the 5∞ buttons to choose  
either OFF, MID or MAX. Press  
ENTER.  
m em o  
The default is OFF.  
SIGNAL PRO LOGIC Neo :6 LOUDNESS  
AUTO  
RF  
MIDNIGHT TONE DNR  
ATT  
STEREO MONO  
TUNED RF ATT  
RDS EON  
dB  
DIGITAL  
DTS ES EX  
Hi-BIT/  
SAMPLING  
MULTI-ROOM  
DIGITAL MPEG AAC  
ANALOG STEREO  
DSP  
SB CH  
ON MOVIE  
AUTO  
OFF MUSIC  
L
C
S
R
LFE  
SP A B  
LS  
RS  
OFF: No Dynamic Range Control.  
MID: A moderate amount of Dynamic Range  
Control.  
MAX: The most Dynamic Range Control available  
is applied.  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Techno Tidbits & Problem -solving  
Dolby  
Dolby Digital  
Dolby Digital is a discrete digital surround format used for multichannel surround sound. It was developed after  
the Dolby Surround System and Dolby Pro Logic Surround System. Dolby Digital is a high quality digital sound  
format that is used by many theatrical film releases.  
Soundtracks using linear PCM audio generate too much  
data for multichannel use. Dolby Digital technology was  
developed in response to the need for efficient  
4 channel analog  
5.1 channel  
multichannel digital sound. It uses masking technology and  
Adaptive Transform Coding, resulting in no audible loss of  
sound quality. In the present age of digital sound Dolby  
Digital is a standard audio format for DVD and has been  
adopted by HDTV broadcasts throughout the USA.  
Other features include:  
1) Downmixing on playback for compatibility with mono,  
stereo, Dolby Pro Logic and 5.1 channel audio.  
2) A wide range of bitrates and channels.  
3) Decoding dynamic range information and adjusting the  
dialog level in the soundtrack (called Dialog Normalization,  
see below for more information).  
Dolby  
Digital  
Dolby Digital for m ovie  
The advantages of the Dolby Digital system of encoding  
allow it to maintain its high quality sound while at the same  
time being very flexible, with the ability to handle many  
different types of soundtracks.  
Dialog Norm alization  
When a Dolby Digital soundtrack is played back the Dialog Normalization function of the receiver activates auto-  
matically. Dialog Normalization is a Dolby Digital function that establishes the average dialog level for the program  
source being played. If the receiver's level does not match the average dialog level, first you see "DIAL NORM" and  
"OFFSET +4 dB" (as an example) appear in the receiver's display. In this example, the number +4 dB is the differ-  
ence between the receiver's gain structure and the Dolby Digital average dialog level. To match the average dialog  
level, subtract or add the OFFSET level. For example, if the OFFSET level is +4 dB, the amplifier's output is 4 dB  
over the average recorded level.  
Dolby Pro Logic II  
Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved version of Dolby Pro Logic technology with extended matrix decoding  
technology that can create 5.1 channel sound from two channel sources. Dolby Pro Logic II creates basic 5  
channel sound by using the innovative "steering logic" circuit. Therefore when listening to typical two-channel  
sources like CD, the listener can enjoy a richer spatial effect. When using software encoded with Dolby  
Surround, this decoding system affords the listener an improved surround experience with greater sound detail.  
Chart Com paring Dolby Pro Logic and Dolby Pro Logic II  
Pro Logic  
Pro Logic II  
Effective sound source  
Dolby Surround encoded sources  
All two channel stereo sources  
Surround Sound  
Frequency Range  
Mono  
Stereo  
Surround within 7kHz  
All Channels/Full Range  
This unit has a three Dolby Pro Logic II functions. The first is "MOVIE Mode" (suitable for film soundtracks);  
"MUSIC Mode" (suitable for music); "Pro Logic Mode" (this mode is less sensitive to the quality of the source  
material, so may be useful when Movie Mode or Music Mode do not give good results). One can select one of  
them depending on your soundtrack of choice.  
• For receivers and components other than the VSX-43TX Dolby Pro Logic II may not have the above  
mentioned functions.  
88  
m em o  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Techno Tidbits & Problem -solving  
Dolby Digital Surround EX  
This new recording technology is able to play 6.1 channel sound and was developed in a collaboration between  
Dolby Laboratories and Lucasfilm, Ltd. for the film "Stars Wars: The First Episode", the first movie ever to be  
made with Dolby Digital Surround EX technology. In a movie theater this format affords the listener vivid  
surround sound experience replete with the effect of sounds flying overhead, even for those seated towards the  
sides of the theater.  
Dolby Digital Surround EX contains surround back channels which are dubbed into the soundtrack in the studio.  
The channels are encoded into the left and right channels of the soundtrack so this format can be compatible  
with Dolby Digital 5.1 channel decoding. For a list of movies that contain Dolby Digital Surround EX soundtracks  
see Dolby website at: http://www.dolby.com  
THX Surround EX technology was developed for movie theater use originally but has been extended for home  
theater use and consumers can no benefit from this excellent, realistic sound format. (For more details see "THX  
Surround EX" on the next page.) This unit is equipped with a THX Surround EX decoder.  
DTS  
DTS  
DTS has been adopted as a sound recording format in the movie theaters since the release of JURASSIC  
PARKin 1993, and has a good reputation for high quality sound and dynamic surround effects.  
In this system, 6 channels of digital sound are recorded on CD-ROM. DTS adopts a simultaneous playback  
format. With a low rate of compression of sound signals and a high rate of transmittance, a higher sound quality  
format is produced. For this reason, the format is being introduced in more and more movie theaters, and is  
being adopted for home use as DTS Digital Surround. When used with movies it's called DTS-LD DVD and for  
music software (5.1 channel CD) as DTS-CD.  
DTS-ES  
DTS launched a new surround format in November 2000. This has come to be known as DTS Extended  
Surround or simply DTS-ES. The technology has been advanced to include two new home formats DTS-ES  
Discrete 6.1 format, and DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 ch format, both are able to playback discrete, 6.1-channel content  
from DVDs and CDs. Both of these formats are compatible with a conventional DTS 5.1 ch decoder. In this  
system each channel is encoded and decoded individually, adding to the separation of the channels. Since DTS  
adds a third surround channel, the surround back channel, the realism and all-encompassing nature of the sound  
reaches levels not seen before in home theater. This unit is equipped with a DTS-ES decoder.  
DTS Neo:6  
This is a matrix decoding technology that transforms two-channel sources into 6.0 channel surround sound.  
There are two modes, CINEMA MODE and MUSIC MODE.  
DTS 96/ 24  
This high-quality format will be used for software which will be available from November, 2001. For compatibility  
with equipment that was produced before this format was made, DVD players can play this software using a  
conventional DTS 5.1ch decoder. This unit is equipped with a DTS 96 kHz/24 bit decoder to take advantage of  
the higher sound quality available.  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Techno Tidbits & Problem -solving  
THX  
THX is a Lucasfilm, Ltd. program dedicated to maximum accuracy in movie presentation. Movie sound tracks are  
recorded in large movie dubbing stages using movie theater equipment. For a sound track to be presented  
accurately in your home, special technologies are required. In your home the room is much smaller and has a  
bright sound, the speakers are very different and there are only six-eight of them, plus, you sit much closer to  
each one of those speakers. Because of these differences we often miss the power and emotion that thrills us  
in a good movie. Now Pioneer and THX have teamed up to bring the full glory of accurate cinema sound to the  
comfort and convenience of your home.  
Re-Equalization™ : In a theater the room is very large and dead sounding, you sit a long way back from the  
speakers and the speakers themselves are very specialized. Because a sound track recorded in this dead  
sounding space when it is played at home it sounds overbright. THX Re-Equalization adjusts for this difference in  
a very precise way.  
Adaptive Decorrelation™ : When a sound track sends mono sound to the surround speakers it often seems to  
be coming come from one side instead of from all around you as it would in a theater. Adaptive Decorrelation  
helps to correct this inaccuracy.  
Tim bre Matching™ : When recording a sound track it is very important that the surround sounds move  
smoothly and seamlessly around the theater. It is very distracting when sounds seem to jump from speaker to  
speaker. Timbre Matching helps to smooth the movement of the surround sounds even though you are using  
only two speakers.  
Bass Peak Level Manager™ : Some Dolby Digital sound tracks can produce bass peaks that are undesirable in  
a home theater environment. The Bass Peak Level Manager allows you to set the maximum peak levels  
appropriate to your system. (Set this function according to the Bass Peak Level instructions on page 86.)  
Loudspeaker Position Tim e Synchronization™ : This feature allows you to adjust for the difference in the  
distance from each individual loudspeaker to the listening position. Doing this ensures that all the speakers  
operate in precise synchronization improving the seamless nature of the soundfield. (Set this function according  
to the Channel Delay instructions on page 40 and the Fine Channel Delay instructions on page 8283.)  
THX Surround EX™ : THX Surround EXDolby Digital Surround EX is a joint development of Dolby Laboratories  
and the THX division of Lucasfilm Ltd.  
In a movie theater, film soundtracks that have been encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX technology are able  
to reproduce an extra channel which has been added during the mixing of the program. This channel, called  
Surround Back, places sounds behind the listener in addition to the currently available front left, front center,  
front right, surround right, surround left and subwoofer channels. This additional channel provides the  
opportunity for more detailed imaging behind the listener and brings more depth, spacious ambience and sound  
localization than ever before.  
When released to the home consumer market, movies that were created using the Dolby Digital Surround EX  
technology, may have a note to that effect on the packaging. A list of movies created using this technology can  
be found on the Dolby web site at http://www.dolby.com.  
Only receiver and controller products bearing the THX Surround EX logo, when in the THX Surround EX mode,  
faithfully reproduce this new technology in the home.  
This product may also engage the "THX Surround EX" mode during the playback of 5.1 channel material that is  
not Dolby Digital Surround EX encoded. In such case the information delivered to the Surround Back channel will  
be program dependent and may or may not be very pleasing depending on the particular soundtrack and the  
tastes of the individual listener.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Techno Tidbits & Problem -solving  
Speaker Placem ent Inform ation  
Placem ent of your speakers is a crucial aspect of attaining accurate and realistic surround sound.  
Certain pointers concerning speakers stands, direction, angle and distance of speakers will be useful  
in this regard.  
Firstly, it is best not to put your speakers directly on the floor. If you do this som e of the sound vibra-  
tion (especially bass) will go directly into the flooring and be lost. Instead we recom m end using ex-  
trem ely hard objects (like cinder blocks) or designated speaker stands to support your speakers. Avoid  
placing the speakers on soft (like cushions or sofas) as these will also lead to sound loss and unstable  
surfaces (like flim sy shelving) as they m ay cause speaker accidents. In order to achieve a surround  
sound effect, m ake sure the speakers are a reasonable distance from your m ain listening position.  
Follow the diagram s and instructions below for optim um placem ent of each set of speakers.  
C
C
F R  
C
F L  
F R  
F L  
F R  
F L  
45~60  
If you're using a CENTER speaker  
set the FRONT speakers to a wider  
angle. If not, set them to a narrower  
angle.  
It is best to angle the speakers  
towards the listening position.  
The angle depends on the size  
of the room. Use less angle for  
bigger rooms.  
Make sure the CENTER speaker  
does not cross the forward plane  
of the FRONT speakers.  
90~120  
90~120  
S R  
S R  
S L  
S L  
S R  
S L  
0~60  
S R  
S L  
S R  
S L  
SBL  
SBR  
SBL  
SBR  
S B  
Surround speakers should be  
Surround back speakers should also be positioned a foot and a half to  
three feet higher than your ears and titled slight downward. Make sure  
the speakers don't face each other. For DVD Audio the speakers should  
be more directly behind the listener than for home theater playback.  
positioned a foot and a half to three  
feet higher than your ears and titled  
slight downward. Make sure the  
speakers don't face each other. For  
DVD Audio the speakers should be  
more directly behind the listener than  
for home theater playback.  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Techno Tidbits & Problem -solving  
Speaker Placem ent for a Com plete THX Speaker System  
If you have a com plete THX Speaker System set (LucasFilm authorized), follow the diagram below to  
place your speakers.  
Notice the surround speakers should output at an angle parallel to the listener. Also, notice the angle  
of the front speakers.  
FL  
C
FR  
Di-polar Radiating Speaker  
SL  
SR  
Surround  
Surround  
SBL  
SBR  
Surround Back  
Speaker Placem ent for DVD-Audio (etc.) Sources  
The best speaker placem ent for DVD-Audio (and other m ultichannel m usic sources) m ay be different  
than for regular DVD discs. For these form ats follow the diagram at right as opposed to the hom e  
theater setups of the preceding pages.  
60˚  
120˚  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Techno Tidbits & Problem -solving  
Preset Code List  
You should have no problem controlling a component if you find the manufacturer in this list, but you can only  
set these codes for the button that is assigned to that component. So, for example, the TV codes can only be  
set to the TV or TVC button. Please note that there are cases where only certain functions may be controllable  
after assigning the proper preset code, or the codes for the manufacturer in the list  
will not work for the model that you are using. If you cant find a preset code that matches the component you  
want to control, you can still teach the remote individual commands from another remote control (page 60).  
5045, 5046, 5047,  
5048  
5049, 5050  
5051  
5052  
5053  
5054, 5055, 5056  
5057, 5058, 5059,  
5060  
5061, 5062, 5063,  
5064  
5065, 5066  
5067, 5068, 5069,  
5070, 5071  
5072  
SIGNATURE  
SONY  
SYLVANIA  
SYMPHONIC  
TATUNG  
TELEFUNKEN  
THORN  
TOSHIBA  
UNIVERSUM  
VIDECH  
5142, 5143  
5144, 5145  
5146, 5147  
5148  
5149  
5150, 5151  
5152  
5153, 5154  
5155  
5156, 5157  
5158  
5159, 5160, 5161  
5162  
5163, 5164  
DVD  
FERGUSON  
FIRST  
FISHER  
FUJITSU  
FUNAI  
Manufacturer  
TOSHIBA  
PANASONIC  
SONY  
JVC  
SAMSUNG  
RCA  
DENON  
PHILIPS  
TOSHIBA  
YAMAHA  
PIONEER  
Code  
1010  
1002  
1009  
1005  
1008  
1007  
1004  
1006  
GE  
GOLDSTAR  
W. WHOUSE  
WARDS  
WATSON  
ZENITH  
GOODMANS  
HITACHI  
1010  
1011, 1012  
1001, 1002, 1003  
ICE  
IRRADIO  
ITT/NOKIA  
JC PENNY  
5073  
VCR  
LD  
5074, 5075  
5076, 5077, 5078,  
5079  
5080, 5081  
5082  
5083, 5084  
5085  
5086, 5087, 5088,  
5089, 5090  
5091  
PIONEER  
3001, 3002, 3003,  
3004, 3005  
3006  
3007, 3008, 3009  
3010, 3011  
3012  
Manufacturer  
SONY  
PHILIPS  
PANASONIC  
KENWOOD  
DENON  
YAMAHA  
PIONEER  
Code  
2008  
2006, 2007  
2005  
2004  
2003  
JVC  
KENDO  
KTV  
LOEWE  
LXI  
ADMIRAL  
AIWA  
AKAI  
ALBA  
AUDIO DYNAMIC 3013, 3014  
2009  
2001, 2002  
BELL&HOWELL  
BLAUPUNKT  
BROCSONIC  
BUSH  
CANON  
CGM  
CITIZEN  
CLATRONIC  
CRAIG  
CURTIS MATHIS  
DAEWOO  
DBX  
DIMENSIA  
EMERSON  
3015  
MAGNAVOX  
MARK  
MATSUI  
MATSUSHITA  
MED I ON  
MITSUBISHI  
MIVAR  
3016, 3017  
3018, 3019  
3020  
3021  
3022, 3023  
3024  
5092  
5093, 5094  
5095, 5096  
5097  
5098, 5099  
5100  
TV  
Manufacturer  
PIONEER  
Code  
5001, 5002, 5003,  
5004, 5005, 5006,  
5007, 5008, 5009,  
5010  
5011, 5012, 5013  
5014, 5015  
5016  
5017  
5018  
5019  
5020  
5021  
5022  
5023  
5024  
5025  
5026, 5027, 5028,  
5029  
3025  
3026  
NEC  
5101, 5102  
NOKIA OCEANIC 5103  
NORDMENDE  
OKANO  
ONWA  
PANASONIC  
3027, 3028, 3029  
3030, 3031, 3032  
3033, 3034  
3035  
3036, 3037, 3038,  
3039, 3040, 3041  
3042  
3043, 3044, 3045,  
3046  
3047, 3048  
3049, 3050, 3051  
3052  
ADMIRAL  
AIWA  
AKAI  
ALBA  
AOC  
BESTAR  
BLAUPUNKT  
BLUE SKY  
BRANDT  
BROCSONIC  
BUSH  
5104, 5105  
5106  
5107  
5108, 5109, 5110,  
5111  
5112, 5113, 5114  
5004  
5115  
5116, 5117  
5118  
5119, 5120  
5121, 5122  
5123, 5124, 5125  
5126  
5127, 5128, 5129  
5130  
5131, 5132  
5133, 5134, 5135  
5136  
5137, 5138  
5139, 5140  
5141  
PHILCO  
FERGUSON  
FISHER  
PHILLIPS  
PHONOLA  
PORTLAND  
PROSCAN  
QUASAR  
RADIO  
RADIO SHACK  
RADIOLA  
RCA/PROSCAN  
SABA  
SAMSUNG  
SANYO  
SCHNE I DER  
SCOTT  
SHARP  
SIEMENS  
FUNAI  
GE  
GOLDSTAR  
GOODMANS  
GRUNDIG  
HITACHI  
CLATRONIC  
CRAIG  
3053, 3054  
3055  
3056, 3057, 3058,  
3059, 3060  
CROSLEX  
CURTIS MATHIS  
DAEWOO  
5030  
5031, 5032, 5033  
5034, 5035, 5036,  
5037, 5038, 5039  
5040  
5041  
5042, 5043, 5044,  
5045, 5046, 5047,  
INSTANT REPLAY 3061, 3062  
ITT/NOKIA  
JC PENNY  
3063  
3064, 3065, 3066,  
3067, 3068, 3069  
3070, 3071, 3072  
3073  
DAYTRON  
DUAL  
EMERSON  
JVC  
KENDO  
KENWOOD  
3074, 3075, 3076  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Techno Tidbits & Problem -solving  
LOEWE  
LUXOR  
LXI  
3077, 3078  
3079  
3080, 3081, 3082,  
3083, 3084, 3085,  
3086  
3087, 3088  
3089  
3090  
3091, 3092  
3093, 3094  
3095, 3096, 3097,  
3098, 3099  
3100, 3101, 3102  
3103  
STB  
DVR  
PIONEER  
6001, 6002, 6003,  
6004, 6005, 6006  
6049  
6007  
6047  
PIONEER  
4001  
BELL  
BLAUPUNKT  
ECHOSTAR  
MD  
MARANTZ  
MARTA  
MATSUI  
MEMOREX  
MINOLTA  
MITSUBISHI  
PIONEER  
DENON  
JVC  
KENWOOD  
SONY  
8001, 8002, 8003  
8004  
8005  
8006  
8007  
GENERAL INSTRUMENT  
6008  
GOLDSTAR  
GRUNDIG  
HAMLIN  
HNS/HUGHES  
HITACHI  
ITT/NOKIA  
JERROLD  
6009  
6010, 6011  
6012, 6013  
6014  
6015  
6016  
6017, 6018, 6019  
6020, 6021  
6022, 6023  
6024, 6025, 6026  
6027, 6028, 6029  
6030, 6031  
6048  
SHARP  
YAMAHA  
8002  
8008, 8009  
MULTITECH  
NEC  
NOKIA OCEANIC 3104  
NOKIA  
NORDMENDE  
OKANO  
OLYMPIC  
ORION  
PANASONIC  
3105, 3106  
3107  
3108  
3109, 3110  
3111  
3112, 3113, 3114,  
3115, 3116, 3117  
3118, 3119  
3120, 3121  
3122  
3123  
3124, 3125  
3126  
3127, 3128, 3129,  
3130, 3131, 3132  
3133  
3134, 3135  
3136  
3137, 3138  
3139, 3140  
3141, 3142, 3143,  
3144, 3145, 3146,  
3147  
TAPE  
PIONEER  
DENON  
FISHER  
9001, 9002  
9003, 9004  
9005, 9006  
9007, 9008  
9009, 9010, 9011  
9012  
9013, 9014, 9015  
9016, 9017  
9018, 9019  
9020, 9021  
9022  
NEC  
OAK  
PANASONIC  
PHILIPS  
PRIMESTAR  
RADIO SHACK  
RCA  
JVC  
KENWOOD  
NAKAMICHI  
ONKYO  
PHILIPS  
SONY  
TEAC  
TECHNICS  
YAMAHA  
PENTAX  
PHILCO  
PHILIPS  
PHONOLA  
QUASAR  
6032  
6033  
6034, 6035  
SAMSUNG  
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA  
6036, 6037, 6038  
SIEMENS  
SONY  
STAR CHOICE  
TOSHIBA  
TOCOM  
RCA/PROSCAN  
REALISTIC  
6039, 6040  
6041  
6048  
6042, 6043  
6044  
6045, 6046  
9023, 9024, 9025,  
9026  
SABA  
SAMSUNG  
SANSUI  
SANYO  
SCHNE I DER  
SCOTT  
ZENITH  
CD/ CD-R  
PIONEER  
DENON  
FISHER  
JVC  
7001, 7002  
7003, 7004, 7005  
7006, 7007  
7008, 7009, 7010,  
7011  
7012, 7013, 7014,  
7015, 7016  
7017, 7018  
7019  
7020, 7021  
7022, 7023  
7024, 7025  
7026, 7027  
7028  
SEG  
SELECO  
SHARP  
SIEMENS  
SIGNATURE  
SONY  
3148  
3149  
3150, 3151, 3152  
3153, 3154, 3155  
3156, 3157  
3158, 3159, 3160,  
3161, 3162, 3163  
3164, 3165, 3166,  
3167  
3168  
3169  
3170  
3171, 3172  
3173, 3174, 3175  
3176, 3177  
3178, 3179  
3180, 3181  
3182, 3183, 3184  
3185, 3186, 3187  
3188  
3189, 3190, 3191,  
3192, 3193  
3194, 3195, 3196  
3197  
KENWOOD  
MAGNAVOX  
MARANTZ  
ONKYO  
PANASONIC  
PHILIPS  
RCA  
SANYO  
SHARP  
SONY  
TEAC  
SYLVANIA  
SYMPHONIC  
TANDBERG  
TASHIRO  
TATUNG  
TEAC  
TECHNICS  
TELEFUNKEN  
THORN  
TOSHIBA  
UNIVERSUM  
W. WHOUSE  
WARDS  
7029  
7030  
7031, 7032, 7033  
7034, 7035  
7036, 7037, 7038,  
7039  
7040, 7041  
7042  
7043  
7044  
7045  
TECHNICS  
YAMAHA  
DENON  
JVC  
KENWOOD  
PHILIPS  
SONY  
YAMAHA  
ZENITH  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Techno Tidbits & Problem -solving  
Troubleshooting  
Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions. If you think that there is something wrong with  
this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other  
components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after exercising the checks  
listed below, ask your nearest PIONEER authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work.  
Sym ptom  
Cause  
Rem edy  
Pow er  
The pow er does not turn on.  
The power plug is disconnected.  
The protection circuit may have been  
Connect the power plug to the wall outlet.  
Disconnect the power plug from the  
activated.  
outlet, and insert again.  
During loud playback the  
pow er suddenly sw itches  
off.  
The protection circuit has been activated  
Turn down the volume.  
because the lowest actual impedance of  
the speakers (as opposed to the speakers’  
rated impedance) is dangerously low.  
When its convenient go to ACOUSTIC  
CALIBRATION EQ (page 8485) and lower  
the 63 Hz and 125 Hz equalizer levels using  
MANUAL setting.  
The unit does not respond  
w hen the buttons are  
pressed.  
Static electricity caused by dry air.  
Switch the unit off, then on again.  
Disconnect the power plug from the  
outlet, and insert again.  
During operation, the unit  
suddenly sw itches off.  
The speaker wires are frayed or sticking  
Reinsert the speaker wires, making sure  
there are no stray strands of wire and that  
they are inserted fully (see page 24)  
out of the jack, and are touching the back of  
the receiver or another set of wires.  
AMP ERR blinks in the  
display and the unit turns  
off. The STANDBY indicator  
w ill blink and the unit  
cannot be turned on.  
The receiver probably has a serious  
Don't try to turn on the receiver. Call a  
problem.  
Pioneer-accredited repair center to look at  
the problem.  
FAN STOP blinks in the  
display and the unit turns  
off.  
Something is stuck in the fan and/or the  
Remove the foreign object from the fan.  
fan is broken.  
If you can't do this and/or the fan is broken  
call a Pioneer-accredited repair center to  
look at the problem.  
OVERHEAT blinks in the  
display and no sound is  
output.  
The receiver has gotten too hot.  
Turn the receiver off and allow it to cool  
down with good ventilation. It is very likely  
that you have a heat dispersal and ventilation  
problem so please follow the instructions in  
Installing the Receiver(page 8) carefully.  
THDCT NG blinks in the  
display and the unit turns  
off.  
The thermistor (temperature sensor) is  
Turn the receiver off, unplug from wall  
broken.  
and call a Pioneer-accredited repair center  
to look at the problem.  
Setup  
After the proper settings  
have been m ade, there still  
seem s to be som ething  
w rong w ith the sound.  
The speakers have been incorrectly  
Check all connections (see page 24).  
connected (+/- connections are reversed).  
No audio  
No sound is output w hen a  
function is selected.  
Improper connections.  
Make sure the component is connected  
correctly (see pages 1522).  
Sound is muted.  
The volume is turned down.  
Speakers are turned off.  
Press MUTING on the remote control.  
Adjust MASTER VOLUME.  
Press SPEAKERS (A/B) to select the  
speakers you connected (see page 66).  
Select the proper signal with the SIGNAL  
SELECT button (see page 42).  
Turn MULTI CH IN mode off (see page  
50).  
DIGITAL/ANALOG setting is incorrect.  
MULTI CH IN mode is on.  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Techno Tidbits & Problem -solving  
Sym ptom  
Cause  
Rem edy  
No sound output from the  
front speakers.  
The front speakers are connected to the  
Connect the front speakers to the A  
B speaker system jack.  
speaker system jacks (see page 24).  
No sound output from  
surround or center speakers.  
Speaker settings are incorrect.  
See SPEAKER SETTING on pages 3738  
to check the speaker settings.  
The surround and/or center speakers are  
Connect the speakers (see page 24).  
Choose a surround listening mode (see  
disconnected.  
The listening mode is STEREO.  
pages 4345).  
No sound output from the  
subw oofer.  
The subwoofer setting is NO.  
Change the setting to YES or PLUS (see page  
3738).  
The subwoofer output setting is too low.  
The bass peak level setting is too low.  
There is very little low frequency  
Adjust the output setting to the level you  
want (see pages 39, 81).  
Adjust the peak level setting to the level  
you want.  
Change your subwoofer setting to one of  
information in your source.  
the following (see pages 3738):  
Front: SMALL Subwoofer:YES  
Front:LARGE Subwoofer:PLUS  
The crossover frequency is set too low.  
There is a problem with the subwoofer.  
Raise the frequency level to match your  
speakers' characteristics (see page 80)  
Check the three following points:  
Check the power.  
Check the subwoofer volume control .  
Check the subwoofer hasn't  
automatically switched to standby mode  
(check the subwoofer manual)  
The subwoofer isn't connected properly.  
The SB CH MODE is set to OFF.  
Check all connections.  
No sound output from the  
surround back speakers.  
Set the SB CH MODE to ON or AUTO  
(see page 51).  
Set the SB CH MODE to ON or AUTO  
The source is not a 6.1 channel playback  
source.  
and choose one of the SURROUND  
listening modes (see pages 4445, 51).  
The surround back speakers aren't  
Check all connections (see pages 1522).  
connected properly.  
The surround back channel is set to 1  
Connect the speaker to the surround  
speaker setting only, and the speaker is  
connected to the right channel output.  
back left channel output (see page 24).  
No sound output from one  
(set of) speaker(s).  
The speaker system setting is NO.  
Change the speaker setting to YES (see  
pages 3738).  
The speaker isn't connected properly.  
The source has no sound output for that  
Check all connections.  
If you choose one of the SURROUND  
channel.  
listening modes, a channel may be created  
for the speaker (see pages 4445).  
The speaker output level is set too small.  
Increase the speaker output level.  
Sound is produced from  
som e com ponents, but not  
from digital com ponents.  
SIGNAL SELECT is set incorrectly.  
Set SIGNAL SELECT to AUTO or  
according to the type of connections made  
(see page 42).  
The digital inputs are assigned  
Set the digital input settings correctly  
incorrectly, or not at all.  
(see page 76).  
The digital components aren't connected  
Check all connections (see page 24).  
Choose a compatible source, or check  
properly.  
The player is not compatible with the  
source you're using, or the player settings  
are incorrect.  
the player's manual for the correct settings.  
The MULTI CH IN mode has been  
Choose one of the listening modes (see  
selected.  
page 41). The MULTI CH IN switches off  
automatically.  
The digital output level has been turned  
Set the digital volume level of the player  
down on a CD player or other component  
equipped with digital output level  
adjustment capability.  
to full, or to the neutral position.  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Techno Tidbits & Problem -solving  
Rem edy  
Sym ptom  
Cause  
Other audio problem s  
Subw oofer output is very  
low.  
Settings route signal away from  
To get more signal to the subwoofer set  
subwoofer.  
it to PLUS or choose SMALL for the front  
speakers (see pages 3738).  
During m ulti channel  
That speaker is set to NO.  
Set the speaker to YES.  
playback, there is no sound  
output from one speaker.  
A m ulti channel DVD source  
appears to be dow nm ixed  
from 2 channels during  
playback.  
The source is coming from something  
Check the MULTI CH IN connection (see  
other than the MULTI CH IN jacks (for  
example, digital PCM output, etc.)  
page 20) and select the type of playback  
with the MULTI CH IN button (see page 50).  
Considerable noise in radio  
broadcasts.  
Incorrect frequency.  
The antenna is not connected.  
Digital cables are near the antenna  
Tune in the correct frequency.  
Connect the antenna (see page 23).  
Route digital cables away from the  
terminals and wires.  
antenna terminals and wires.  
Broadcast stations cannot  
be selected autom atically.  
The antenna is poorly positioned.  
Adjust the direction and position for best  
reception.  
Interference caused by other equipment  
Turn off the equipment causing the noise  
(fluorescent lamp, motor, etc.).  
or move it away from the receiver.  
Place the antenna farther away from the  
equipment causing the noise.  
Connect an outdoor AM or FM antenna  
(see page 23).  
Weak radio signals.  
Noise or hum can be heard  
even w hen there is no sound  
being input.  
There is electrical interference from  
Check that personal computers or other  
another component or appliance.  
digital components connected to the same  
power source are not causing interference.  
When a search is perform ed  
by a DTS com patible CD  
player during playback,  
noise is output.  
The search function performed by the  
This is not a malfunction, but be sure to  
player interferes with the reading of digital  
information.  
turn the volume down to prevent the output  
of loud noise from your speakers.  
When playing a DTS form at  
LD there is noise audible on  
the soundtrack.  
The SIGNAL SELECT is on ANALOG.  
Set the SIGNAL SELECT to DIGITAL (see  
page 42).  
Audio doesn't record (in  
som e cases, even if video  
does).  
You are trying to make an analog  
You can only record analog to analog, or  
recording from a digital signal, or a digital  
recording of an analog source.  
digital to digital. Make sure the playback  
and recording components are hooked up  
with the same kind of connections.  
The digital source is copy protected.  
The jacks for recording have not been  
You can't record digital sources that have  
been copy protected.  
Check connections (see pages 19 & 21).  
connected properly.  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Techno Tidbits & Problem -solving  
Sym ptom  
Cause  
Rem edy  
Video  
No im age is output w hen a  
function is selected.  
Improper connections.  
Make sure the component is connected  
correctly (see pages 15,1618).  
The input source is not properly selected.  
The video input selected on the TV  
Press the correct function button.  
Please read the TV monitor manual and  
monitor is incorrect.  
The TV or monitor is hooked up with cord  
change the settings accordingly.  
Use the same cable to connect to your  
that is different than that used for the video  
player.  
TV and all your video equipment (see pages  
1522).  
The component video setting is  
Select the correct COMPONENT-IN  
incorrect.  
SELECT setting (see page 77).  
There is no im age com ing  
from the selected  
The type of cord connected to the TV  
Change the settings to match the cord  
doesn't match your video input settings.  
connected (see pages 1522).  
com ponent video jacks.  
Can't record video.  
The source is copy protected.  
You are trying to record a source  
You can't record sources that have been  
copy protected.  
Connect the component with S video or  
composite video cords (see pages 1618).  
Hook up the source and the recorder  
connected to the component video jacks.  
The recorder's video input is hooked up  
using a different type of cord to the source  
video output.  
using the same type of video cord (see  
pages 1618).  
Input/ display  
The display is dark.  
The display DIMMER button is pushed.  
Press DIMMER on the remote control  
repeatedly to return to the default setting  
(see page 53).  
You can't get DIGITAL to  
com e up w hen using the  
SIGNAL SELECT button.  
Either the digital connections or the  
Make sure the digital connections (see  
DIGITAL IN SELECT is incorrect.  
page 1618 & 21) and the DIGITAL-IN  
SELECT (see page 76) are done correctly.  
MULTI CH IN mode is on.  
Turn MULTI CH IN mode off (see page  
50) .  
The digital form at indicator  
doesn't light up even w hen  
playing a non-PCM digital  
source.  
The player is paused or stopped.  
There is a mistake in the player settings  
Play the source.  
Fix the audio settings (check the manual  
for audio output.  
that came with your DVD player).  
A com pressed digital source  
is being played, but the  
digital form at indicators  
don't light up.  
Although it's a non-PCM digital source  
There is no problem. The indicator won't  
there is a possibility the present track is not  
the proper format (5.1, 6.1, or 7.1 channel).  
light when the track is not a compressed  
digital source.  
During playback of a  
com pressed digital source,  
the PRO LOGIC ll or NEO:6  
indicators show in the  
display.  
The digital signal is not being sent with  
Choose DIGITAL or AUTO with the signal  
select button (see page 42).  
This is not a malfunction. Check the  
manufacturer information for the source.  
the source.  
The audio is in two channel format.  
It has already been Dolby surround  
encoded.  
During playback of a  
Surround EX or DTS ES  
source on the AUTO setting,  
the EX and ES indicators  
w on't light.  
The source may be 6.1 playback  
Switch the SB CH MODE to ON (see  
compatible, but there is no signal from the  
source to indicate this.  
page 51).  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Techno Tidbits & Problem -solving  
Rem edy  
Sym ptom  
Cause  
During playback of a DVD  
audio source, the player  
show s a transfer rate of  
96kHz, but the receiver does  
not.  
The multichannel connections are analog,  
This is not a malfunction. See the  
so there is no digital transfer.  
player's manual for more details.  
During playback of a 96kHz  
source, the display doesn't  
show 96kHz  
The receiver may be on a different mode  
than STEREO.  
One of the DIGITAL NR, MIDNIGHT,  
Switch to STEREO mode (see page 43).  
Turn it/them off (see page 4749).  
LOUDNESS, or TONE features is switched  
on.  
Rem ote control  
Cannot be rem ote  
controlled.  
The remote control batteries have worn  
Replace the batteries (see page 7).  
out.  
Too far away or improper angle of  
Operate within 25 feet and a 30° angle of  
operation.  
the remote sensor on the front panel (see  
page 8).  
There is an obstacle between the  
Remove the obstacle or operate from  
another position (see page 8).  
Avoid exposing the remote sensor on the  
front panel to direct light.  
receiver and the remote control.  
shining onto the unit's remote control signal  
light-receiving window.  
Strong light such as fluorescent light is  
A cord is connected to the CONTROL IN  
terminal on this unit.  
The IR Receiver type is mismatched with  
the setting.  
Connect cord to the correct jack.  
Disconnect the IR Receiver from the rear  
panel, and set to the other IR Receiver type  
using the remote control.  
Other com ponents can't be  
operated w ith the system  
rem ote.  
The preset code settings are wrong.  
The batteries wore out and the system  
Input the correct preset code.  
Reset the proper system settings.  
settings were cleared.  
The SR cable is connected,  
but the connected  
com ponents can't be  
The SR cable hasn't been connected  
Reinsert the SR cable, making sure it is  
properly.  
the right jack (see page 71).  
Make sure an analog connection has  
been made between the units.  
This is not a malfunction.  
The rest of the component connection  
have not been made.  
operated w ith the rem ote.  
The component you have hooked up is  
not SR compatible.  
If the unit does not operate norm ally due to external effects such as static electricity  
Disconnect the power plug from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Techno Tidbits & Problem -solving  
Schem ata of Setup  
1.Surround Setup  
SurrBack System  
1
[
[
[
[
[
SurrBack System  
Quick  
Normal  
Expert  
Exit  
]
]
]
]
]
[
[
[
[
Normal System  
Secound Zone  
Front Bi-Amp  
Exit  
]
]
]
]
Speaker Setting  
QUICK  
Subwoofer  
Center SP  
SurrBack SP  
Room size  
[
Free  
]
]
[ THX  
[ YES]  
[ YES]  
[ YES]  
Front  
Center  
Surround  
SurrBack  
Subwoofer  
[Exit]  
[SMALL]  
[SMALL]  
[SMALL]  
2
3
2. THX CINEMA Setup  
[
Medium  
]
]
Listening Position  
Center  
X
[
[SMALL 2]  
[
[
[
[
PRO LOGIC II MOVIE ]  
[
YES  
]
[Exit]  
PRO LOGIC  
Neo:6 CINEMA  
Exit  
]
]
]
Channel Level  
Test Tone  
[Manual]  
[Auto]  
Normal  
[
Exit  
]
[
[
[
[
Speaker Setting  
]
]
]
]
Channel Level  
Channel Delay  
Exit  
Digital-In Select  
3.Input Assign  
Digital-1  
Digital-2  
Digital-3  
Digital-4  
[ TV/SAT ]  
CD-R  
[DVD/LD]  
CD  
[
]
[
[
Digital-In Select  
Component-In Select  
]
]
[
]
[Exit]  
[Exit]  
Channel Delay  
L
Front  
Center  
Front  
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
10. 5ft  
9. 0ft  
10. 0ft  
8. 5ft  
7. 0ft  
6. 5ft  
8. 0ft  
11. 5ft  
R
R
R
L
L
Surround  
SurrBack  
SurrBack  
Surround  
Subwoofer  
Component-In Select  
[Exit  
]
System Setup  
Component-1 [DVD/LD  
Component-2 [ TV/SAT  
]
]
[1. Surround Setup  
[2. THX CINEMA Setup  
[3. Input Assign  
[4. Function Rename  
[Exit  
]
]
]
]
]
[
Exit  
]
Crossover Network  
Expert  
(4. Function Rename)  
Frequency  
[
[
[
[
[
[
]
]
]
]
]
]
50Hz  
80Hz  
100Hz  
150Hz  
200Hz  
Exit  
[Crossover Network  
[Fine Channel Level  
[Fine Channel Delay  
[Acoustic Cal EQ  
[Bass Peak Level  
[D-Range Control  
[Exit  
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
4
DVD/LD  
TV/SAT  
VCR1/DVR  
VCR2  
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
DVD/LD  
TV/SAT  
VCR1/DVR  
VCR2  
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
VIDEO  
LINE  
VIDEO  
(THX Speaker  
=
80Hz)  
LINE  
CD  
CD  
CD-R/TAPE1  
MD/TAPE2  
CDR/TAPE1  
MD/TAPE2  
[Exit  
]
Fine Channel  
STD:Front  
L
Lev+el1.  
5
dB  
Front  
R
Center  
Surround  
Surround  
SurrBack  
SurrBack  
Subwoofer  
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
+1.  
5
5
0
5
0
0
0
dB  
dB  
dB  
dB  
dB  
dB  
dB  
+1.  
L
+2.  
R
L
-1.  
+3.  
R
+2.  
+10.  
[
Exit  
]
Fine Channel Delay  
STD:Front  
L
10. 5ft  
Front  
Center  
Surround  
Surround  
SurrBack  
SurrBack  
Subwoofer  
R
[ 10. 5ft  
[ 10. 0ft  
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
L
R
L
R
[
[
[
[
8. 5ft  
7. 0ft  
6. 5ft  
8. 0ft  
[ 11. 5ft  
[
Exit  
]
Acoustic Cal EQ  
[Center  
EQ]  
R
R
L
L
[
[
[
[
[
Surround  
SurrBack  
SurrBack  
Surround  
EQ  
EQ  
EQ  
EQ  
]
]
]
]
Exit  
]
Bass Peak Level  
[Setting Start  
[Setting Cancel  
]
]
[Exit  
]
Dynamic Range Control  
Select Mode  
dts  
[OFF]  
[
[
[
MID  
MAX  
Exit  
]
]
]
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Techno Tidbits & Problem -solving  
We Want You Listening For A  
Lifetime  
EIA  
ES  
T
1 9 2 4  
S
I
We  
Want You  
LISTENING  
For A Lifetime  
Used wisely, your new sound equipment will provide a  
lifetime of fun and enjoyment. Since hearing damage from  
loud noise is often undetectable until it is too late, this  
manufacturer and the Electronic Industries Association’s  
Consumer Electronics Group recommend you avoid  
prolonged exposure to excessive noise. This list of sound  
levels is included for your protection.  
Selectingfineaudioequipmentsuchastheunityou’ve  
justpurchasedisonlythestartofyourmusicalenjoyment.  
Now it’s time to consider how you can maximize the fun  
andexcitementyourequipment offers.Thismanufacturer  
and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer  
Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your  
equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the  
sound come through loud and clear without annoying  
blaring or distortion-and, most importantly, without  
affecting your sensitive hearing.  
Decibel  
Level Example  
30  
40  
Quiet library, soft whispers  
Living room, refrigerator, bedroom away from  
traffic  
50  
60  
70  
80  
Light traffic, normal conversation, quiet office  
Air conditioner at 20 feet, sewing machine  
Vacuum cleaner, hair dryer, noisy restaurant  
Averagecitytraffic,garbagedisposals,alarmclock  
at two feet.  
Sound can be deceiving. Over time your hearing  
“comfort level” adapts to higher volumes of sound. So  
what sounds “normal” can actually be loud and harmful  
to your hearing. Guard against this by setting your  
equipment at a safe level BEFORE your hearing adapts.  
THE FOLLOWING NOISES CAN BE  
DANGEROUS UNDER CONSTANT EXPOSURE  
To establish a safe level:  
• Start your volume control at a low setting.  
• Slowly increase the sound until you can hear it  
comfortably and clearly, and without distortion.  
90  
Subway, motorcycle, truck traffic, lawn mower  
Garbage truck, chain saw, pneumatic drill  
Rockbandconcertinfrontofspeakers,thunderclap  
Gunshot blast, jet plane  
100  
120  
140  
180  
Once you have established a comfortable sound level:  
• Set the dial and leave it there.  
Rocket launching pad  
Information courtesy of the Deafness Research Foundation.  
Taking a minute to do this now will help to prevent  
hearing damage or loss in the future. After all, we want  
you listening for a lifetime.  
EIA  
ES  
T
1 9 2 4  
S
We  
Want You  
I
LISTENING  
For A Lifetime  
Maintenance of External Surfaces  
Use a polishing cloth or dry cloth to wipe off dust  
and dirt.  
When the surfaces are dirty, wipe with a soft  
cloth dipped in some neutral cleanser diluted five  
or six times with water, and wrung out well, and  
then wipe again with a dry cloth. Do not use  
furniture wax or cleaners.  
Never use thinners, benzine, insecticide sprays  
or other chemicals on or near this unit, since  
these will corrode the surfaces.  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Techno Tidbits & Problem -solving  
Specifications  
Am plifier Section  
Com ponent Video Section  
Input (Sensitivity)  
Continuous average pow er output of  
100 w atts* per channel, m in., at 8  
ohm s, from 20 Hz to 20,000 Hz w ith no  
m ore than 0.09 %** total harm onic  
distortion (front).  
Y
................................................................ 1 Vp-p/75  
PB/PR ............................................................. 0.7 V/75 Ω  
Output (Level/Impedance)  
Y
................................................................ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω  
PB/PR ............................................................. 0.7 V/75 Ω  
Frequency Response  
Y
................................................. 5 Hz to 40 MHz +30 dB  
Continuous Power Output  
+0  
3  
Front .............. 100 W +100 W (20 Hz 20 kHz, 0.09 % , 8 )  
Center ........... 100 W +100 W (20 Hz 20 kHz, 0.09 % , 8 )  
Surround ........ 100 W +100 W (20 Hz 20 kHz, 0.09 % , 8 )  
Surround Back  
.................. 100 W +100 W (20 Hz 20 kHz, 0.09 % , 8 )  
Input (Sensitivity/Impedance)  
VCR 1/DVR, VCR 2, DVD/LD, TV/SAT, VIDEO, CD,  
CD-R/TAPE 1, MD/TAPE 2 ................... 335 mV/47 kΩ  
Frequency Response  
PB/PR ............................................ 5 Hz to 40 MHz dB  
VIDEO Section (Com posite)  
Input (Sensitivity/Impedance)  
VCR 1/DVR, VCR 2, VIDEO, DVD/LD,  
TV/SAT ......................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω  
Output (Level/Impedance)  
VCR 1/DVR, VCR 2, MONITOR OUT,  
VCR 1/DVR, VCR 2, DVD/LD, TV/SAT, VIDEO, CD,  
CD-R/TAPE 1, MD/TAPE 2 ...... 5 Hz to 100,000 Hz dB  
Output (Level/Impedance)  
VCR 1/DVR REC, VCR 2 REC, CD-R/TAPE 1 REC,  
MD/TAPE 2 REC .................................... 335 mV/2.2 kΩ  
Tone Control  
MONITOR OUT2 ......................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω  
+0  
3  
Frequency Response  
VCR 1/DVR, VCR 2, TV/SAT, DVD/LD  
VIDEO=MONITOR OUT, ............. 5 Hz to 10 MHz +30dB  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio ................................................ 65 dB  
BASS ..................................................... ± 6 dB (100 Hz)  
TREBLE ................................................. ± 6 dB (10 kHz)  
LOUDNESS ........................... +4/+2 dB (100Hz/10 kHz)  
(at volume position -40dB)  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF, short circuited, A network)  
VCR 1/DVR, VCR 2, DVD/LD, TV/SAT, VIDEO, CD,  
CD-R/TAPE 1, MD/TAPE 2, MULTI CH IN .......... 101 dB  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio [EIA, at 1 W (1 kHz)]  
VCR 1/DVR, VCR 2, DVD/LD, TV/SAT, VIDEO, CD,  
CD-R/TAPE 1, MD/TAPE 2 .................................... 83 dB  
FM Tuner Section  
Frequency Range ........................... 87.5 MHz to 108 MHz  
Usable Sensitivity ........ Mono: 13.2 dBf, IHF (1.3 µV/75 )  
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity ......................... Mono: 20.2 dBf  
Stereo: 38.6 dBf  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio ................... Mono: 73 dB (at 85 dBf)  
Stereo: 70 dB (at 85 dBf)  
Distortion ........................................ Stereo: 0.5 % (1 kHz)  
Alternate Channel Selectivity ................... 60 dB (400 kHz)  
Stereo Separation ........................................ 40 dB (1 kHz)  
Frequency Response ................. 30 Hz to 15 kHz (± 1) dB  
Antenna Input ......................................... 75 unbalanced  
*
Measured pursuant to the Federal Trade Commissions  
Trade Regulation rule on Power Output Claims for  
Amplifiers.  
** Measured by Audio Spectrum Analyzer.  
AM Tuner Section  
Frequency Range ............................ 530 kHz to 1,700 kHz  
Sensitivity (IHF, Loop antenna) ........................... 350 µV/m  
Selectivity ................................................................. 25 dB  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio ................................................ 50 dB  
Antenna ........................................................ Loop antenna  
VIDEO Section (S jack)  
Input (Sensitivity/Impedance)  
VCR 1/DVR, VCR 2, VIDEO, DVD/LD, TV/SAT  
Luminance signal (Y) ............................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω  
Chrominance signal (C) ..................... 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω  
Output (Level/Impedance)  
Miscellaneous  
Power Requirements ............................... AC 120 V, 60 Hz  
Power Consumption ............................................... 600 W  
Power Consumption in Standby mode .................... 0.6 W  
AC Outlet SWITCHED ......................... 100 W (0.8 A) MAX  
Dimensions .................... 420 (W) × 188 (H) × 464 (D) mm  
(16-9/16 (W) × 7-7/16 (H) × 18-5/16 (D) in.)  
VCR 1/DVR, VCR 2, MONITOR OUT  
Luminance signal (Y) ............................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω  
Chrominance signal (C) ..................... 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω  
Frequency Response  
VCR 1/DVR, VCR 2, VIDEO, DVD/LD, TV/SAT  
Luminance signal (Y) ................ 5 Hz to 10 MHz dB  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio  
+0  
3  
Weight (without package) ................... 17.3 kg (38 lb 3 oz)  
Luminance signal (Y) ........................................ 65 dB  
Furnished Parts  
FM wire Antenna ............................................................. 1  
AM loop Antenna ............................................................. 1  
AAIEC LR6 batteries .................................................. 2  
Remote Control Unit ........................................................ 1  
Operating Instructions .................................................... 1  
NOTE:  
Specifications and the design are subject to possible  
modifications without notice, due to improvements.  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Techno Tidbits & Problem -solving  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Published by Pioneer Corporation.  
Copyright © 2002 Pioneer Corporation.  
All rights reserved.  
PIONEER CORPORATION 4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS [USA] INC.  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R OP2, Canada  
PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11  
P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A.  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.  
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: [03] 9586-6300  
San Lorenzo 1009 3er Piso Desp. 302 Col. Del Valle Mexico D.F. C.P. 03100  
TEL: 55-5688-5290  
Printed in  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
<TNGZF/02E00001>  
<ARB7261-A>  

Perle Systems Network Router MDC User Manual
Perlick Refrigerator BLM 2000 User Manual
Philips CRT Television 13PT User Manual
Philips Flat Panel Television 17PF9946 37B User Manual
Philips Stereo System 8FF3FPB User Manual
Porter Cable Stereo Receiver MCM155 User Manual
Powermate Portable Generator PM050562217 User Manual
Premier Gas Heater GPX 40 HXRT User Manual
Psion Teklogix Laptop 7530 G2 User Manual
PYLE Audio Car Stereo System PLVW1345R User Manual